JP5657634B2 - Amusement stand - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a game table represented by a ball game machine (pachinko machine) and a spinning machine (slot machine).

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is known a game machine that changes only the display mode of a hold icon corresponding to a hold that is a target of a prefetch notice.

JP 2008-200302 A

  In the conventional game machine, there is a problem that the display of the hold icon tends to be monotonous and is easily bored by the player. Further, in the conventional game stand, there is a problem that it is difficult to maintain the player's expectation because the period during which the display mode of the hold icon changes tends to be short.

  An object of the present invention is to provide a game machine capable of displaying a hold icon in various display modes.

The above purpose is
A first symbol display means capable of executing at least symbol variation display;
Display means capable of displaying at least a plurality of types of hold icons;
First control means capable of controlling at least the first symbol display means;
Second control means capable of controlling at least the display means;
A game machine equipped with
At least one of the plurality of types of hold icons is a first hold icon,
At least one of the plurality of types of hold icons is a second hold icon,
The display means is a means capable of displaying at least a number of hold icons corresponding to the number of holds,
The second control means is a means capable of executing at least the first control when the first condition is satisfied,
The first condition is a condition that may be satisfied when one or more hold icons are displayed,
The first control is control for causing the display means to display at least a first image;
In the first control, at least a part of the display area of the first image and at least a part of the display area of the second image overlap each other. Control for displaying at least an image on the display means;
The first control is a control capable of causing the display means to display the first image preferentially over the second image;
The first image is the hold icon;
The second image is an image showing a position where the hold icon is displayed,
The second hold icon is an icon having a different form from the first hold icon,
The second hold icon is an icon displayed as a prefetch notice,
The display means is means capable of displaying the second image according to the first aspect,
The display means is means capable of displaying the second image according to a second aspect,
The second image being displayed in the second embodiment, Ri image der displayed as pre-read notice,
Prefetching notice by displaying the second hold icon (hereinafter referred to as “first prefetching notice”) and prefetching notice by displaying the second image in the second mode (hereinafter referred to as “first notice”). Second pre-reading notice ”), the second pre-reading notice ends after the first pre-reading notice,
The hold of the subject of the first look-ahead notice and the hold of the subject of the second look-ahead notice are the same,
This is achieved by a game stand characterized by that.

  ADVANTAGE OF THE INVENTION According to this invention, the game stand which can display a pending | holding icon with a various display mode is realizable.

It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention from the front side (player side). It is the external view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention from the back side. 1 is a schematic front view of a game board 200 of a pachinko machine 100 according to a first embodiment of the present invention as viewed from the front. It is a circuit block diagram of a control part of pachinko machine 100 by a 1st embodiment of the present invention. It is an example of the display symbol in the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention, Comprising: (a) shows an example of the stop display symbol of special figure 1, (b) shows the stop display symbol of special figure 2 (C) is an example of a decorative symbol, and (d) is a diagram illustrating an example of a normal stop display symbol. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main control part main process of the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main control part timer interruption process of the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the flow of the special figure prefetch process in the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the prefetch result memory | storage part for special figures 1 and the special figure 2 with which the main control part 300 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention was equipped. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process in the 1st sub control part 400 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention, (a) shows the flow of a 1st sub control part main process, (b) Shows the flow of the first sub-control unit command reception interrupt process, (c) shows the flow of the first sub-control unit timer interrupt process, (d) shows the flow of the effect control process, (e) is The flow of image control processing is shown. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the flow of the icon display control process in the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process in the 2nd sub control part 500 of the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention, (a) shows the flow of the 2nd sub control part main process, (b) Shows the flow of the second sub-control unit command reception interrupt process, and (c) shows the flow of the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process. It is a figure which shows the example of the determination table in the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the special figure determination table in the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment of the present invention, the variation time of each variation timer for each timer number, the timer group to which each variation timer belongs, and the type of effect that can be executed during the variation time using each variation timer It is a figure which shows an example. It is a figure which shows the example of the notification object icon display aspect lottery table in the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the notice non-target icon display aspect lottery table in the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the icon display mode in the pachinko machine 100 by the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 1-1 of the 1st Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is FIG. (The 1) which shows the example of the effect display in Example 1-2 of the 1st Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is FIG. (The 2) which shows the example of the effect display in Example 1-2 of the 1st Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 1-3 of the 1st Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 1-4 of the 1st Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 1-5 of the 1st Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 1-6 of the 1st Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 1-7 of the 1st Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 1-8 of the 1st Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 1-9 of the 1st Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 1-10 of the 1st Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 1-11 of the 1st Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 1-12 of the 1st Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect display in Example 1-13 of the 1st Embodiment of this invention in time series. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the flow of the icon display control process in the pachinko machine 100 by the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the flow of the icon display control process in the pachinko machine 100 by the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the table used by the icon attached image lottery process in the pachinko machine 100 by the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect in Example 2-1 of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect in Example 2-1 of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the production in Example 2-2 of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the production in Example 2-3 of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the effect in Example 2-4 of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the production in Example 2-5 of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the production in Example 2-5 of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the production in Example 2-6 of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the production in Example 2-7 of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the production in Example 2-7 of the 2nd Embodiment of this invention.

[First Embodiment]
Hereinafter, a gaming machine (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine or a spinning machine such as a slot machine) according to the first embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the figure is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side). As an external structure, the pachinko machine 100 includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a launching device 110, and a game board 200 on the front surface.

  The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation location (island facilities or the like) provided in a gaming machine installation sales shop. The main body 104 is referred to as an inner frame, and is a member that is provided inside the outer frame 102 and serves as a longitudinal rectangular gaming machine base body that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112. The main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space 114 inside. In addition, when the main body 104 is opened, an inner frame opening sensor (not shown) that detects the opening of the main body 104 is provided.

  The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104 on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 so as to be openable and closable with a lock function, and is configured in a frame shape so as to be inside thereof. Is a door member having an opening 116. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin at the opening 116, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. A game area 124 is defined by the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200. Further, a front frame door opening sensor (not shown) that detects opening of the front frame door 106 when the front frame door 106 is opened is provided.

  The front frame door 106 can store a plurality of game balls (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as “balls”) in a portion below the opening 116 and guide the game balls to the launching device 110. The upper plate 126 is provided, the lower plate 128 that stores game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, and the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 by the player's operation are discharged to the lower plate 128. A ball release button 130, a ball discharge lever 132 for discharging game balls stored in the lower plate 128 by a player's operation to a game ball collection container (common name, dollar box), and a player's operation to the launcher 110. The ball launching handle 134 that launches the guided game ball to the game area 124 of the game board 200, and the chance to change the effect mode of various effect devices 206 (not shown in FIG. 1) by the player's operation. To the button 136, a chance button lamp 138 that causes the chance button 136 to emit light, a setting operation unit 137 that can be set by a setting person (for example, a player or a game clerk), and a card unit (CR unit) A ball lending operation button 140 for instructing ball lending, a return operation button 142 for instructing the card unit to return the player's balance, and a ball lending display section for displaying the player's balance and card unit status ( (Not shown). In addition, a lower plate full tank sensor (not shown) that detects that the lower plate 128 is full is provided.

  The launching device 110 is attached to the lower side of the main body 104, and a launching rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching rod 148 that strikes the game ball at the tip of the launching rod 146. .

  The setting operation unit 137 is a push button type switch that can be pressed by the setter, and a confirm (OK) button, an upper button positioned above the confirm button, a lower button positioned below the confirm button, and confirm A right button positioned to the right of the button, a left button positioned to the left of the confirm button, and a cancel (C) button positioned further to the right of the right button. The setting operation unit 137 includes an operation unit sensor that detects the pressing of each button. The setting operation unit 137 of this example has a unit structure in which buttons and operation unit sensors are integrated. At least one of the buttons of the setting operation unit 137 functions as a chance button that changes the effect mode of the various effect devices 206 (see FIG. 3) by the player's operation when a predetermined condition is satisfied. It may be.

  The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening 116 after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104.

  FIG. 2 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 1 viewed from the back side. The upper part of the back surface of the pachinko machine 100 has an opening that opens upward, a ball tank 150 for temporarily storing game balls, and a lower part of the ball tank 150 that is formed at the bottom of the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 for guiding a ball that has passed through the communicating hole and dropped to the dispensing device 152 located on the right side of the back surface is provided.

  The payout device 152 is formed of a cylindrical member, and includes a payout motor, a sprocket, and a payout sensor (not shown) inside. The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor. The sprocket that temporarily passes through the tank rail 154 and flows down into the payout device 152 is temporarily retained, and the payout motor is driven to rotate by a predetermined angle. Thus, the temporarily accumulated game balls are sent one by one downward to the payout device 152.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket. When the game ball is passing, either a high signal or a low signal is displayed. Either the high signal or the low signal is output to the payout controller 600 (see FIG. 4). The game ball that has passed through the payout sensor passes through a ball rail (not shown) and reaches the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100. The pachinko machine 100 has this configuration. To pay out the ball to the player.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the drawing, the main board case 158 that houses the main board 156 that constitutes the main control unit 300 that performs control processing for the entire game, and the production based on the processing information generated by the main control unit 300. The first sub-control unit 400 that performs the control process and the first sub-board 160 that houses the first sub-board 160 that includes the rotary volume control switch 161 that adjusts the volume output from the pachinko machine 100 by the operation of the game shop clerk. A second sub-board case 166 that houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the second sub-control unit 500 that performs a control process related to the production based on the processing information generated by the first sub-control unit 400; An error release switch that constitutes a payout control unit 600 that performs control processing related to payout of game balls and that releases an error by the operation of a game store clerk 68, a payout board case 172 for storing a payout board 170, a launch board case 176 for housing a launch board 174 that constitutes a launch control unit 630 for performing control processing relating to the launch of a game ball, and a power source for various electric gaming machines. And a power switch 178 that turns the power on and off by the operation of a game clerk and an RWM clear switch 180 that outputs an RWM clear signal to the main control unit 300 when the power is turned on. A power board case 184 that houses the power board 182, a CR interface unit 186 that transmits and receives signals between the dispensing control unit 600 and the card unit, and a main board for outputting information of the pachinko machine 100 to an external hall computer or the like 156, the first sub-board 160, etc. and the hall computer, etc. It is provided with a relay substrate 188, the to relay.

  The main board 156, the first sub board 160, the second sub board 164, and the like need to be changed for each model, and thus are provided on the back of the game board 200. The outer frame 102 is provided for common use.

  FIG. 3 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front. In the game board 200, an outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are arranged, and a game area 124 in which a game ball can roll is defined. An effect device 206 is disposed in the approximate center of the game area 124. The effect device 206 is provided with a decorative symbol display device 208 at substantially the center. The effect device 206 performs the effect by operating the effect movable body 224, and details thereof will be described later.

  The game board 200 of this example is a game board for a so-called right-handed machine. In the right-handed machine, by changing the launch strength of the game ball by operating the ball launching handle 134, the falling path of the game ball is divided into a right path on the right side from the effect device 206 and a left path on the left side from the effect device 206. be able to. In this example, the ease of entering a ball to the ordinary figure starting port 228, special figure 1 starting port 230, special figure 2 starting port 232 (open state), variable winning ports 234, 235 (open state), etc., which will be described later, is as follows. The game ball that falls on the right path is different from the game ball that falls on the left path.

  About each of the normal figure start port 228, the special figure 2 start port 232, and the variable prize opening 235, the general figure start port 228, the special figure 2 start opening 232, and the variable prize opening 235 are arranged on the right path. Therefore, it is relatively easy to enter a game ball falling on the right path, and it is relatively difficult or impossible to enter a game ball falling on the left path. On the other hand, with respect to each of the special figure 1 starting port 230 and the variable winning port 234, due to the influence of the arrangement pattern of the game nails 238, the warp device 242, and the like, the entrance of the game ball falling on the left path is relative. It is relatively easy to enter a game ball that falls on the right path. In the present embodiment, a right-handed machine is taken as an example, but a right-handed machine may be used.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 is a display device for displaying decorative images and various images (moving images or still images) used for production. In the present embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 208 is configured by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display). The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four symbol display regions 208a, a left symbol display region 208a, a middle symbol display region 208b, a right symbol display region 208c, a fourth symbol display region 208e, and an effect display region 208d. The middle symbol display area 208b and the right symbol display area 208c display different decorative symbols, the fourth symbol display area 208e displays the fourth symbol, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for the effect. Furthermore, the positions and sizes of the display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, 208d, and 208e can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the example shown in FIG. 3, the display position of the fourth symbol display area 208 e is fixed at the lower end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, in the example shown in FIG. 3, one 4th symbol display area 208e corresponding to each of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is provided (two in total), but both special figure 1 and special figure 2 are provided. There may be provided only one fourth symbol display area 208e corresponding to. In addition, although the liquid crystal display device is employ | adopted as the decoration symbol display apparatus 208, it is not a liquid crystal display device, What is necessary is just the structure which can display various effects and various game information, for example, a dot matrix display device Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

  Below the gaming area 124, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol hold lamp 218, and a second special symbol hold lamp 220 A normal symbol holding lamp 216 and a high-probability medium lamp 222 are provided. In addition, hereinafter, the normal symbol may be referred to as “general symbol”, the special symbol as “special symbol”, the first special symbol as “special symbol 1”, and the second special symbol as “special symbol 2”.

  The general map display device 210 is a display device for displaying a general map, and is configured by a 7-segment LED in the present embodiment. The special figure 1 display device 212 and the special figure 2 display device 214 are display devices for displaying the special figure, and are configured by 7 segment LEDs in the present embodiment.

  The multi-purpose hold lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of general-purpose variable games that are on hold (details will be described later). It is possible to hold. The special figure 1 holding lamp 218 and the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of special figure variable games that are held (details will be described later). In the present embodiment, the special figure variable games are predetermined. It is possible to hold up to a number (for example, 4). The high-probability medium lamp 222 is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur or a high probability state, and the gaming state is changed from a low probability state in which a big hit is unlikely to occur. Turns on when switching to the probability state, and turns off when switching from the high probability state to the low probability state.

  In addition, there are predetermined ball entrances such as a general prize opening 226, a general figure start opening 228, a special figure 1 start opening 230, a special figure 2 start opening 232, and a variable prize opening around the rendering device 206. 234 and 235 are disposed.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of general winning holes 226 are provided on the game board 200, and when a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning holes 226 (in the general winning holes 226). In the case of winning, the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The player can freely take out the balls discharged to the upper plate 126. With these configurations, the player can pay out the winning balls to the player based on winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. In the present embodiment, the game balls are paid out to the player as a consideration for winning (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “prize balls”) and balls lent to the player (hereinafter referred to as “rental balls”). May be included).

  The normal start port 228 is configured by a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed through a predetermined area of the game area 124. In the present embodiment, the game board 200 includes One is arranged on the right path. Unlike the ball that has entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the usual starting port 228 is not discharged to the amusement island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that a ball has passed through the general map starting port 228, the pachinko machine 100 starts a general map variable game by the general map display device 210.

  In the present embodiment, only one special figure 1 starting port 230 is provided at the center of the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the special opening 1 starting port 230, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls as prize balls to the upper plate 126. Then, the special figure variable game (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “special figure 1 variable game”) by the special figure 1 display device 212 is started. Note that the ball that has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  The special figure 2 starting port 232 is called an electric tulip (electrical chew), and in this embodiment, only one is provided on the right path. The special figure 2 starting port 232 is provided with a pair of blade members 232a that can be opened and closed to the left and right. When the blade members 232a are closed, it is impossible to enter a ball. When 210 hits and stops and displays the symbol, the blade member 232a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the special opening 2 232, the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, four) of balls is discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. Then, a special figure variable game (hereinafter, also referred to as “special figure 2 variable game”) by the special figure 2 display device 214 is started. The ball that has entered the special figure 2 starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  The variable winning openings 234 and 235 are called a large winning opening or an attacker. In the present embodiment, only one variable winning opening 234 is provided below the center of the game board 200, and the variable winning opening 235 is on the right path. Only one is provided. The variable winning openings 234 and 235 are each provided with a door member that can be freely opened and closed, and a ball cannot be entered while the door member is closed. If the special figure display device stops and displays the jackpot symbol after winning the special figure variation game, for example, one door member of the variable prize opening 234, 235 is closed at a predetermined time interval (for example, opening time 29 seconds, closing time) It opens and closes at a predetermined number of times (for example, 16 times). When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable winning opening 234, 235, the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls is discharged to the upper plate 126 as a winning ball. The balls that have entered the variable winning openings 234 and 235 are guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  Further, a plurality of disk-shaped hitting direction changing members 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails 238 are arranged in the vicinity of these winning openings and starting openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, An out port 240 is provided for guiding a ball that has not won a prize or starting port to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging it to the game island side.

  The pachinko machine 100 supplies the ball stored in the upper plate 126 by the player to the launch position of the launch rail, drives the launch motor with strength according to the operation amount of the player's ball launch handle 134, and The outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are made to pass through the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 by the 146 and the launcher 148 and are launched into the game area 124. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the traveling direction by the hitting direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, and the like, Winning out the starting port (Special Figure 1 starting port 230, Special Figure 2 starting port 232), winning out any winning port or starting port, or just passing through the normal starting port 228 To reach.

  Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. On the front side of the stage device 206, a warp device 242 (242a, 242b) and a front stage 244 are arranged in an area where the game ball can roll, and an effect movable body 224 is placed in the area where the game ball cannot roll. It is arranged. In addition, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter may be referred to as a door or a shutter) are disposed on the back side of the effect device 206. That is, in the effect device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding device 246 are positioned behind the warp device 242, the front stage 244, and the effect movable body 224. The warp device 242 discharges the game ball that has entered the warp inlet 242a provided at the upper left of the effect device 206 to the front stage 244 below the front surface of the effect device 206 from the warp outlet 242b. The front stage 244 can roll a ball discharged from the warp outlet 242b or a ball carried by a nail of the game board 200, and the passed ball is in the center of the front stage 244. A special route 244a is provided to facilitate entry to 230.

  The effect movable body 224 of this example includes a horizontally long flat panel on which the model name of the pachinko machine 100 and the like are displayed. The effect movable body 224 is movable by a stepping motor (not shown) so that the front of the decorative symbol display device 208 can be moved in a vertical direction within a plane substantially parallel to the display screen.

  The shielding device 246 includes a lattice-like left door 246a and right door 246b, and is disposed between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are fixed to the upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b, respectively. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b move to the left and right as the belt driven by the motor through the pulley moves. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the shielding device 246 covers the inner end portions of the shielding device 246 so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the decorative symbol display device 208. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, each inner end portion slightly overlaps the outer end portion of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can visually recognize all of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can be stopped at arbitrary positions, respectively, for example, only a part of the decorative design so that the player can identify which decorative design the displayed decorative design is. Can be shielded. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b may be configured so that a part of the decorative symbol display device 208 behind the lattice hole can be visually recognized, or the shoji part of the lattice hole is closed with a translucent lens body. The display by the decorative symbol display device 208 may be made vaguely visible to the player, or the shoji part of the holes in the lattice is completely blocked (shielded), and the decorative symbol display device 208 behind is made completely invisible. Also good. The shielding device 246 of this example is configured to expose the lower end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 even when the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed. As a result, the fourth symbol display area 208e located at the lower end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is visible regardless of the open / closed state of the shielding device 246.

  Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. This figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit. The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. The first sub-control unit 400 that performs control, the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on the command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, and the main control unit 300 according to the command transmitted by the main control unit 300 The payout control unit 600 controls the game ball payout, the launch control unit 630 performs the game ball launch control, and the power supply control unit 660 controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100. .

  First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, a time And a counter timer 312 for measuring the number of times and a WDT 314 for monitoring an abnormality in the program processing. Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock.

  The basic circuit 302 has a random value generation circuit (counter circuit) 318 (a counter circuit) 318 (used as a hardware random number counter that changes a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 every time a clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received. This circuit includes two counters) and a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor for detecting a game ball passing through each start port, winning port, variable winning port, or opening the front frame door A sensor circuit for receiving signals output from various sensors 320 including a sensor, an inner frame opening sensor, and a lower plate full sensor, and outputting an amplification result and a comparison result with a reference voltage to the random value generation circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302 322, a drive circuit 324 for performing display control of a predetermined symbol display device such as the special figure 1 display device 212 or the special figure 2 display device 214, and a predetermined figure A drive circuit 326 for performing display control of the display device, for example, the general map display device 210, and various status display units 328 (for example, the general map hold lamp 216, the special figure 1 hold lamp 218, the special figure 2 hold lamp 220, the high Driving circuit 330 for performing display control of the center lamp 222 and the like, and various movable members such as a blade member 232a of the special drawing 2 starting port 232 and door members of the variable winning ports 234 and 235 are opened and closed. A drive circuit 334 for controlling the solenoid 332 is connected. In this example, the crystal oscillator 316a and the random value generation circuit 318 are provided separately, but the crystal oscillator 316a may be included in the random value generation circuit 318.

  When the sphere detection sensor 320 detects that a sphere is won at the special figure 1 starting port 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the sphere has been detected to the random value generation circuit 318. Upon receiving this signal, the random value generation circuit 318 latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the special figure 1 starting port 230, and stores the latched value in the built-in counter value corresponding to the special figure 1 starting port 230. Store in the register. Similarly, when the random value generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that the ball has won the special figure 2 starting port 232, the random number generation circuit 318 latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the special figure 2 starting port 232. The latched value is stored in a built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the special figure 2 starting port 232.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 is connected to an information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via this information output circuit 336. The game information (for example, game state) of the machine 100 is output.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power source control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 338 is a voltage value of the power source. Is lower than a predetermined value (9 V in this example), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When an activation signal is input, game control is started (main control section main processing described later is started).

  The main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. Communication with the 1 sub control part 400 and the payout control part 600 is enabled. Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is one-way communication. The main control unit 300 sends commands and the like to the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600. The first sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 are configured such that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted to the main control unit 300. However, information communication between the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the payout control unit 600 may be performed by bidirectional communication.

  Next, the first sub control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based mainly on commands transmitted from the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time and frequency. It is installed. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The basic circuit 402 is provided with a ROM 406 for storing a control program and various effect data. The ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in separate ROMs.

  The basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC (S-ROM) 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and amplifier) and a drive circuit 420 for controlling various lamps 418 (for example, the chance button lamp 138). A driving circuit 432 for controlling the driving of the shielding device 246, a shielding device sensor 430 for detecting the current position of the shielding device 246, a chance button sensor 426 for detecting the pressing of the chance button 136, and an output from the speaker 120. A volume adjustment switch 161 (not shown in FIG. 4) for adjusting the volume to be operated, an operation unit sensor (not shown) for detecting depression of each button of the setting operation unit 137, and detection signals from these sensors An image stored in the ROM 406 based on a sensor circuit 428 output to the basic circuit 402 and a signal from the CPU 404 Are connected to the VDP (Video Display Processor) 434 which generates display image using a work area of VRAM436 reads over data or the like to display an image on the decorative pattern display unit 208, a.

  Next, the second sub control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. ing. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 512 for measuring time, the number of times, and the like. doing. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. The basic circuit 502 is provided with a ROM 506 in which a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, data for image display, and the like are stored.

  The basic circuit 502 includes a drive circuit 516 for controlling the drive of the effect movable body 224, an effect movable body sensor 424 that detects the current position of the effect movable body 224, and a detection signal from the effect movable body sensor 424. Is output to the basic circuit 502, a game board lamp drive circuit 530 for controlling the game board lamp 532, and a game table frame lamp drive for controlling the game table frame lamp 542 The circuit 540 is connected to a serial communication control circuit 520 that performs lighting control by serial communication between the game board lamp drive circuit 530 and the game stand frame lamp drive circuit 540.

  Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The payout control unit 600 controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 mainly based on a command signal or the like transmitted from the main control unit 300, and wins or rents a ball based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604. It is detected whether or not the payout has been completed. Further, the payout control unit 600 communicates with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 via the interface unit 606.

  The launch control unit 630 outputs a control signal output from the payout control unit 600 to permit or stop the launch, or a launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134 to operate the ball launch handle 134 by the player. Control of the launch motor 632 that drives the launcher 146 and launcher 148, and control of the ball feeder 634 that supplies the launcher 110 with a ball from the upper plate 126 based on a control signal that indicates the launch intensity according to the amount. I do.

  The power control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into a DC voltage, converts it to a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400, the payout device 152, etc. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 supplies a power storage circuit (for example, a power supply circuit) for supplying power to a predetermined part (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the external power supply is cut off. , Capacitor). In the present embodiment, a predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub control unit 500, and the main control unit 300, the second sub control unit 500, and the launch control are supplied from the payout control unit 600. Although the predetermined voltage is supplied to the unit 630, the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit and each device through another power supply path.

  Next, using FIG. 5A to FIG. 5D, the special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure 2 display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the universal figure display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed. The types of figures and ordinary drawings will be described. FIG. 5 (a) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of FIG. 1, and FIG. 5 (b) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of FIG. The special figure 1 variable game is started on the condition that the first start port sensor detects that the ball has entered the special figure 1 start opening 230, and the special figure 2 start opening 232 indicates that the ball has entered 2 The special figure 2 variable game is started on condition that the start sensor is detected. When the special figure 1 variable game is started, the special figure 1 display device 212 performs “variable display of special figure 1” which repeats lighting of all seven segments and lighting of one central segment. When the special figure 2 variable game is started, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs “variable display of special figure 2” by repeating all lighting of the seven segments and lighting of the central one segment. . These “variation display of special figure 1” and “variation display of special figure 2” correspond to an example of the symbol fluctuation display in the present embodiment. When the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation in FIG. 1 elapses, the special figure 1 display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special figure 1 and the fluctuation time determined before the fluctuation starts in the special figure 2. After the elapse, the special figure 2 display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special figure 2. Therefore, from the start of “figure display of special figure 1” until the stop symbol form of special figure 1 is stopped, or after the start of “fluctuation display of special figure 2”, the stop symbol form of special figure 2 is displayed. Until stop display corresponds to an example of the symbol fluctuation stop display referred to in the present embodiment, the stop symbol mode of special figure 1 or 2 is stopped and displayed after the "fluctuation display of special figure 1 or 2" is started. A series of displays until this is done is referred to as symbol variation stop display. The symbol variation stop display may be continuously performed a plurality of times.

  FIG. 5A shows five types of special illustrations “special drawing A” to “special drawing E” as the stop symbol forms in the symbol fluctuation stop display of special drawing 1. In FIG. 5 (a), the white portions in the drawing indicate the locations of the segments that are turned off, and the black portions indicate the locations of the segments that are turned on. “Special Figure A” is a 16 round (16R) special jackpot symbol, and “Special Figure B” is a 16R jackpot symbol. In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, determination of whether or not a big hit in the special figure variable game is made by lottery of hardware random numbers, and determination of whether or not a special big hit is made by lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the jackpot and the special jackpot is the difference in whether the probability of winning the jackpot is high (special jackpot) or low (jackpot) in the next special figure variation game. Hereinafter, a state with a high probability of winning the jackpot is referred to as a special figure high probability state (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “special figure certain change” or simply “probable change”), and a state with a low probability is specially designated. This is called a low probability state. In addition, after the 16R special jackpot game ends and after the 16R jackpot game ends, both shift to the time-saving state (electric support state). Although the short time will be described in detail later, the short time state is referred to as a normal high probability state (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “general probability change”), and the non-short time state is referred to as a general low probability state. “Special Figure A”, which is a 16R special jackpot symbol, is a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state, and “Special Figure B”, which is a 16R jackpot symbol, is a special figure low probability ordinary figure high probability state. These “special chart A” and “special chart B” are symbols that have a relatively high degree of advantage over the player.

  “Special figure C” is a 2R jackpot symbol called sudden probability change, and is a special figure high probability normal figure high probability state. That is, “Special Figure C” is 2R compared to “Special Figure A” which is 16R.

  “Special figure D” is a small hit symbol, and is a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. In addition, “special drawing E” is an off symbol, and is a symbol with a relatively small advantage to the player.

  FIG. 5 (b) shows four types of special figures “Special figure a” to “Special figure d” as stop symbol forms in the symbol fluctuation stop display of Special figure 2. “Special figure a” is a 16R special jackpot symbol, “Special figure b” is an 8R special jackpot symbol, “Special figure c” is an 8R jackpot symbol, and “Special figure d” is a missing symbol. In the present embodiment, five types of special charts “Special Figure A” to “Special Figure E” are used as the stop symbol forms of Special Figure 1, whereas “Stop Special” of Special Figure 2 is “Special Figure”. Four types of special figures, “a” to “special d”, are used. By configuring in this way, there is a case where a difference can be provided between the advantages of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 without changing the probability of being a big hit and the probability of being probable. In this example, the advantage of special figure 2 is higher than that of special figure 1. For example, the jackpot of Special Figure 1 includes a sudden probability change (Special Figure C) in which almost no ball is obtained, whereas the jackpot of Special Figure 2 does not include a sudden probability change.

  FIG. 5 (c) shows an example of a decorative design. There are 10 types of decoration patterns of the present embodiment: “Decoration 1” to “Decoration 10”. The first start port sensor detects that a ball has won the special figure 1 starting port 230 or the special figure 2 starting port 232, that is, the ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230, or the special figure 2 Each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided on the condition that the second start port sensor detects that a ball has entered the start port 232. In the symbol display area, “decoration 1” → “decoration 2” → “decoration 3” →... → “decoration 9” → “decoration 10” → “decoration 1” →. “Change design of symbols”.

  Then, the 16R special jackpot for "Special Figure A", the 16R big jackpot for "Special Figure B", the 16R special jackpot for "Special Figure a", the 8R special jackpot for "Special Figure b", and the 8R big jackpot for "Special Figure c" In the case of notification, the combination of symbols in which three same decorative symbols are arranged in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c (for example, “decoration 1-decoration 1-decoration 1”, “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 2”, etc.) is stopped. indicate. When explicitly displaying the 16R special jackpot of “Special Figure A”, the 16R special jackpot of “Special Figure a”, and the 8R special jackpot of “Special Figure b”, the same odd three decorative symbols are arranged side by side The combination (for example, “decoration 3—decoration 3—decoration 3”, “decoration 7—decoration 7—decoration 7”, etc.) is stopped and displayed.

  Further, when a 2R jackpot called “sudden change” of “special drawing C” is notified, “decoration 1-decoration 3—decoration 5” is stopped and displayed. When notifying the small hit of “special drawing D”, “decoration 1—decoration 2—decoration 3” is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, in the case of notifying the special symbol E and the special symbol d, a symbol combination other than the symbol combination shown in FIG.

  FIG.5 (d) shows an example of the usual stop display symbol. In the present embodiment, there are two types of stoppage display modes of “normal map A”, which is a winning symbol, and “general symbol B”, which is a missed symbol. Based on the fact that the above-mentioned gate sensor has detected that the sphere has passed through the general start port 228, the general map display device 210 repeats the lighting of all seven segments and the lighting of one central segment. Perform a “normal change display”. Then, when notifying the winning of the common figure variable game, the “normal figure A” is stopped and displayed, and when notifying the deviation of the common figure variable game, the “normal figure B” is stopped and displayed. Also in FIG. 5D, the white portions in the figure indicate the segment locations where the light is extinguished, and the black portions indicate the location of the segments where the light is illuminated.

  Next, main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing of the main control unit. As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with the start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs the start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which this activation signal is input executes a main control unit main process according to a control program stored in advance in the ROM 306 after resetting by a reset interrupt.

  First, in step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In the initial setting 1, the stack initial value is set in the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304 (temporary setting), the interrupt mask is set, the I / O 310 is initialized, the various variables stored in the RAM 308 are initialized, and the WDT 314 is set. Enable operation, set initial values, etc. In this embodiment, a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in WDT 314 as an initial value.

  In step S103 following step S101, the value of the counter of WDT 314 is cleared, and the time measurement by WDT 314 is restarted. In step S105 subsequent to step S103, whether or not the low voltage signal is ON, that is, the voltage value of the power supply that the voltage monitoring circuit 338 supplies from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 is a predetermined value. When it is less than (9 V in this example), it is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects that the power supply is cut off), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect that the power supply is cut off), the step is performed. The process proceeds to S107. Even when the predetermined value (9 V) is not yet reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

  In step S107, initial setting 2 is performed. In the initial setting 2, a process for setting a numerical value for determining a cycle for executing a main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, in the counter timer 312, a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, a 1) a process of outputting a clear signal from the output port 1), a setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like.

  In step S109 following step S107, it is determined whether or not to return to the state before the power interruption (before power interruption). In the case of initializing), the process proceeds to initialization processing (step S113). Specifically, first, a RAM clear signal transmitted when a store clerk or the like of an amusement store operates the RWM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board is turned on (indicates that there has been an operation). That is, it is determined whether or not the RAM clear is necessary. If the RAM clear signal is on (when the RAM clear is necessary), the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to the initial state. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is OFF (when the RAM clear is not necessary), the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and the power status information is information indicating suspend. It is determined whether or not. If the power status information is not information indicating suspend, the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to the initial state. If the power status information is information indicating suspend, all 1-byte data stored in a predetermined area (for example, all areas) of the RAM 308 is added to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0. Thus, the checksum is calculated, and it is determined whether or not the calculated checksum result is a specific value (for example, 0) (whether or not the checksum result is normal). When the checksum result is a specific value (eg, 0) (when the checksum result is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to return to the state before the power interruption, and the checksum result is a specific value. If the value is other than 0 (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 to set the pachinko machine 100 to the initial state.

  In step S111, power recovery processing is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read out and reset to the stack pointer (this setting). In addition, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read out and reset in each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and registers, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state when the power is turned off. That is, the processing is resumed from the instruction next to the instruction (predetermined in step S115) performed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later) immediately before the power interruption. The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a transmission information storage area. In step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the power has been restored to the state at the time of power-off. In the command setting transmission process (step S233) in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, which will be described later, the first sub control unit 400. Sent to.

  In step S113, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization process, interrupt prohibition setting, stack initial value setting to the stack pointer (this setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Further, here, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and, like the power recovery command, the command setting transmission process (in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300) ( In step S233), the data is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

  In step S115 subsequent to step S113, the basic random number initial value updating process is performed after setting the interrupt prohibition. In this basic random number initial value update process, three initial value generations for generating the initial values of the three random number counters for generating the normal winning random number value, the special figure 1 random value, and the special figure 2 random value respectively. The random number counter for use and the two random number counters for generating each of the random number value for determining the usual figure variation time and the random value for determining the special figure fluctuation time are updated. For example, if the numerical value range that can be taken as the random number value for determining the normal time variation is 0 to 100, the value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the random value for determining the normal time variation time provided in the RAM 308 and acquired. Then, 1 is added to the obtained value and stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. Other initial value generation random number counters and random number counters are similarly updated. The initial value generation random number counter is also updated in a basic random number initial value update process (step S207) described later. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S115 except during a timer interrupt process that starts every predetermined period.

  Next, a main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit timer interrupt process. The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (in this example, about once every 2 ms), and the main control unit timer interrupt processing is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. At a predetermined cycle.

  First, in step S201, a timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving each register value of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed. In step S203 following step S201, the WDT 314 is periodically updated so that the WDT 314 count value exceeds the initial setting value (32.8 ms in this example) and no WDT interruption occurs (so as not to detect a processing abnormality). Therefore (in this example, the restart is performed once in about 2 ms, which is the period of the main control unit timer interrupt).

  In step S205 subsequent to step S203, input port state update processing is performed. In this input port state update process, the detection signals of various sensors 320 including the above-mentioned front frame door open sensor, inner frame open sensor, lower pan full sensor, and various ball detection sensors are input via the input port of the I / O 310. The input is monitored for the presence or absence of a detection signal, and stored in a signal state storage area provided for each of the various sensors 320 in the RAM 308. If the detection signal of the sphere detection sensor is described as an example, information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in the timer interruption process (about 4 ms before) is stored in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area partitioned and stored in the RAM 308 in the previous detection signal storage area partitioned for each sphere detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before) ) Is read from the current detection signal storage area provided for each sphere detection sensor in the RAM 308, and this information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area described above. To remember. Further, the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-described current detection signal storage area.

  Further, in step S205, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the above-mentioned detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern information. This main control unit timer interrupt process that is repeatedly started at a very short interval of about 2 ms while one game ball passes one ball detection sensor is started several times. For this reason, every time the main control unit timer interrupt process is activated, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed in step S205. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before, a previous detection signal, and a current detection signal. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection and noise of the sphere detection sensor, it is determined that there is a prize when the detection signal is stored twice continuously after no detection signal.

  In the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300, winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is no previous detection signal, that there is a previous detection signal, and that there is a current detection signal) is stored. In step S205, information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each sphere detection sensor is pre-determined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, no previous detection signal, previous detection signal present, current detection signal present). In the case of the general winning opening 226, the variable winning openings 234, 235, the special figure 1 starting opening 230, and the special figure 2 starting opening 232, or the ordinary drawing starting opening 228. Is determined to have passed. In other words, it is determined that there has been a winning at these winning ports 226, 234, 235 and the starting ports 230, 232, 228. For example, when the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three matches with the above-described winning determination pattern information in the general winning opening sensor for detecting the winning at the general winning opening 226, there is a winning at the general winning opening 226. If the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winnings are performed. The process branches to the subsequent process without performing the process associated with winning the prize to the mouth 226.

  The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal before, no previous detection signal, no current detection signal). After it is determined that there has been a single win, it is not determined that there has been a win until the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times matches the winning determination clear pattern information in each ball detection sensor, and the winning determination is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is next determined whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information.

  In step S207 subsequent to step S205, a basic random number initial value update process is performed, and in the next step S209, a basic random number update process is performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the initial value generation random number counter performed in step S115 is updated, and then used in the main control unit 300. Three random number counters for generating one random value and one special figure 2 random value are updated. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as a random number value for a normal winning number is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from a random number counter storage area for generating a normal winning random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. If it is determined that the random number counter has made a round as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, the value of the initial value generating random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired, and the random number counter storage area Set to.

  For example, a value is acquired from a random number counter for generating a regular winning random number that fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 100, and a result obtained by adding 1 to the acquired value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is acquired as an initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the random number counter for generating the random number for winning the normal number, The initial value set this time is stored in the above-mentioned initial value storage area in order to determine that the random number counter for generating a normal winning random value has made one round next, in addition to setting the random number counter for generating a winning random value Keep it. In addition to the initial value storage area described above for determining that the random number counter for generating a random number for generating a regular figure has made one round next, a random number counter for generating a special figure 1 random value and a special figure 2 random value The RAM 308 is provided with an initial value storage area for determining that each of the generation random number counters has made one round. In the present embodiment, the counter for acquiring the special figure 1 random value and the counter for acquiring the special figure 2 random value are provided separately, but the same counter may be used.

  In step S211 following step S209, effect random number update processing is performed. In this effect random number update process, a random number counter for generating an effect random number used by the main control unit 300 is updated.

  In step S213 following step S211, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update process, the time for displaying and changing the symbol on the special symbol display device 212 and the time for displaying and changing the symbol on the special symbol display device 212 are counted. Special figure 1 display symbol update timer, Special figure 2 display symbol update timer for measuring the time for the symbol to be changed / stopped on the special figure 2 display device 214, a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined opening time, a predetermined time Various timers including a timer for counting the closing time, a predetermined end effect period, and the like are updated.

  In step S215 subsequent to step S213, a winning opening counter updating process is performed. In this winning opening counter updating process, when the winning openings 226, 234, 235 and the starting openings 230, 232, 228 have been won, the number of winning balls stored in the RAM 308 for each winning opening or for each starting opening is stored. The value of the area is read and 1 is added to set the original prize ball number storage area.

  In step S217 following step S215, a winning acceptance process is performed. In this winning acceptance process, it is determined whether or not there has been a winning at the special figure 1 starting port 230, the special figure 2 starting port 232, the ordinary drawing starting port 228, and the variable winning ports 234, 235. Here, the determination is made using the determination result of whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information in step S205. Further, the special figure prefetching process is executed in the winning acceptance process. Details of the special figure prefetching process will be described later.

  When the special figure 1 starting port 230 is won and the corresponding special figure 1 holding number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the special figure 1 starting port 230 of the random number generation circuit (hard random number circuit) 318 A special figure 1 winning random number value generated by performing predetermined processing on a value stored in a corresponding built-in counter value storage register is acquired, and a special figure is generated from a special figure 1 random number generation random number counter provided in the RAM 308. One random value is acquired and stored in the special figure 1 random value storage area in the order of acquisition. The special figure 1 winning random number values and the special figure 1 random number values in the special figure 1 random value storage area are stored in the same number as the special figure 1 reservation number stored in the special figure 1 reservation number storage area. In the special figure 1 random value storage area, each time the special figure 1 holding number decreases, the data of the combination of the special figure 1 winning random number and the special figure 1 random value having the highest holding order (first) is deleted. At the same time, processing is performed so that the data holding order of the remaining special figure 1 winning random number value and special figure 1 random value group is incremented by one. Also, each time the special figure 1 holding number increases, a new special figure 1 is added to the next holding order of the data of the combination of the special figure 1 winning random number value and the special figure 1 random value having the lowest (last) holding order. The data of a set of winning random numbers and special figure 1 random values is written.

  When the special figure 2 starting port 232 is won and the corresponding special figure 2 reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, a built-in counter corresponding to the special figure 2 starting port 232 of the random number generation circuit 318 The special figure 2 winning random number value generated by performing predetermined processing on the value stored in the value storage register is acquired, and the special figure 2 random number value is acquired from the special figure 2 random value generation random number counter provided in the RAM 308. Then, they are stored in the special figure 2 random value storage area in the order of acquisition. The special figure 2 winning random number values and the special figure 2 random number values in the special figure 2 random number storage area are stored in the same number as the special figure 2 reservation number stored in the special figure 2 reservation number storage area. In the special figure 2 random value storage area, each time the special figure 2 hold number decreases, the data of the combination of the special figure 2 winning random value and the special figure 2 random value with the highest holding order is deleted, and the remainder The special ranking 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random value set data are processed so that the holding order is incremented by one. Also, every time the special figure 2 hold number increases by one, a special special figure 2 winning random number value is added to the next holding rank of the special figure 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random value pair having the lowest holding order. And special figure 2 random value set data is written.

  When a winning is made at the general figure start opening 228 and the corresponding general figure holding number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, a value is obtained from the random number counter for generating the normal figure winning random number value as a normal figure winning random number value. Are stored in the corresponding ordinary random number storage area. When there is a winning at the variable winning opening 234, 235, information indicating that a ball has entered the variable winning opening 234, 235 is stored in the winning storage area for the variable winning opening.

  In step S219 following step S217, a payout request number transmission process is performed. Note that the output schedule information and the payout request information output to the payout control unit 600 are composed of, for example, 1 byte, strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bit 6 Power-on information (if turned on, indicates that this is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4-5 indicate the current processing type for encryption (0-3), and bits 0-3 indicate encryption The number of payout requests after processing is shown.

  In step S221 following step S219, a normal state update process is performed. This normal state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the normal state. For example, in the general diagram state update process in the middle of the normal map change display (the value of the above-mentioned general map display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7 segment LED constituting the general map display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off. Turns off drive control. By performing this control, the general map display device 210 performs normal variable display (normal map variable game).

  Also, in the general state update process at the timing when the normal map change display time has elapsed (the timing at which the value of the general map display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), When the 7-segment LED constituting the general-purpose display device 210 is turned on / off to control the display mode, and the normal-map hit flag is off, the general-purpose display is displayed so that the display mode of the off symbol is displayed. The 7 segment LED constituting the device 210 is controlled to be turned on / off. Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the normal state update process. Here, the above-described lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and the setting area is set to indicate that the normal stop display is being performed. By performing this control, the universal symbol display device 210 determines the symbol of either the winning symbol (general symbol A shown in FIG. 5 (d)) or the off symbol (general symbol B shown in FIG. 5 (d)). Display. Thereafter, information indicating the stop period is set in a storage area of a normal stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms). With this setting, the symbol that has been confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the normal game.

  Further, if the result of the usual figure variable game is a hit, the usual figure hit flag is turned on. When the usual figure hit flag is on, in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (when the usual figure stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), A normal operation is set in the setting area, and a predetermined open period (for example, 2 seconds), a solenoid for driving to open / close the blade member 232a of the special opening 2 232 (a part of various solenoids 332), A signal for holding 232a in the open state is output, and information indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the usual state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 500 ms), A signal for holding the blade member in the closed state is output to the solenoid 332 for opening and closing driving, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the normal state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (when the value of the blade closing time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the non-operating state is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. To do. Furthermore, if the result of the usual figure fluctuation game is out of place, the usual figure flag is turned off. In the case where the usual figure hit flag is off, even in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (when the value of the usual figure stop time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, normal operation inactive is set. In the general state update process in the case where the general map is not operating, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S223.

  In step S223, a general drawing related lottery process is performed. In this general map-related lottery process, the open / close control of the general map variable game and the special map 2 start port 232 is not performed (the state of the normal map is not in operation), and the number of the general map variable games that are on hold When the number is 1 or more, it is determined whether or not the result of the usual figure variation game is won or not by the random lottery based on the usual figure winning random number value stored in the above random number value storage area. Make a hit judgment. In the case of winning, the flag for a normal figure provided in the RAM 308 is set to ON, and in the case of an incorrect selection, the flag for a normal figure is set to OFF. In addition, regardless of the result of the hit determination, the value of the random number counter for generating the random time value for determining the normal fluctuation time described above is acquired as the random value for determining the normal fluctuation time, and the acquired normal fluctuation time is determined. Based on the random number value, one time for displaying the variable map on the general map display device 210 is selected from a plurality of variable times, and this variable display time is set as a normal map variable display time in the RAM 308. Store in the variable time storage area. In addition, the number of pending general figure variable games is stored in the general figure pending number storage area provided in the RAM 308, and from the number of pending general figure variable games each time a hit determination is made. The value obtained by subtracting 1 is re-stored in the usual figure number-of-holds storage area. Also, the random number value used for the hit determination is deleted.

  Next, the special figure state update process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed. First, the special figure state update process (the special figure 2 state update process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S225). In the special figure 2 state update process, one of the following processes is performed according to the state of the special figure 2.

  For example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer described above is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the special figure 2 display device 214 is turned on and off. Repeatedly turn on / off drive control. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs the special figure 2 variable display (special figure 2 variable game). Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area described above, and then the process ends.

  Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with flags such as a 16R big hit flag, an 8R big hit flag, a 2R big hit flag, a small hit flag, a loss flag, a special figure probability fluctuation flag, and a normal figure probability fluctuation flag. . These flags are set to ON or OFF based on the determined stop symbol in the special figure 2 related lottery process and the special figure 1 related lottery process described later. In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the special figure 2 variable display time has passed (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer changes from 1 to 0), for example, when the 16R big hit flag is on 5 (b) shows that the special figure a, the 8R big hit flag is on, and the special figure probability variation flag is on, the special figure b, the 8R big hit flag is on, and the special figure probability variation flag is off. When the special flag c and the off flag are turned on, the 7-segment LED constituting the special figure 2 display device 214 is controlled to be turned on / off so that the special figure d is displayed. 2 is set to indicate that the stop display is being performed. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs fixed display of any one of the special figures a to d.

  Thereafter, in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308. With this setting, the specially displayed special figure 2 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 2 variable game is notified to the player. In addition, if the time reduction number stored in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the time reduction number, and if the subtraction result becomes 1 to 0, the special figure probability is changing. If not, turn off the time flag. Further, the hourly flag is also turned off during the big hit game (in the special game state). Also, if the probability variation number stored in the probability variation number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the probability variation number, and if the subtraction result is 1 to 0, the special figure probability variation flag. Turn off.

  Further, the special transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the design for stopping the variable display is shown in FIG. The special figure 2 identification information indicating the presence is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data, which will be described later, and the processing is terminated.

  Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on. When the big hit flag is on, in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the setting of the RAM 308 is set. In order to set a special figure 2 in operation in the area and wait for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period during which an image for notifying the player that a big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is started is displayed. In addition, information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a predetermined release period (for example, 29 seconds) Or, until a winning of a predetermined number of game balls (for example, 10 balls) is detected in the variable winning holes 234, 235) solenoids for opening / closing the door members of the variable winning holes 234, 235 (part of various solenoids 332) In addition, a signal for holding the door member in the opened state is output, and information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the door opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening release setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the door opening time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member in a closed state is output to a solenoid for opening / closing the door member of the variable prize opening 234, 235 (a part of various solenoids 332), and a door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308 is used. Information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In addition, the opening / closing control of the door member is repeated a predetermined number of times (in this embodiment, 16 rounds or 8 rounds in the case of Special Figure 2, 16 rounds or 2 rounds in the case of Special Figure 1), and is started at the end timing. In the special figure 2 state update process to be performed, a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period in which an image for informing the player of the end of the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed is set. Therefore, information indicating the effect standby period is set in the storage area of the effect standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Also, if the normal probability fluctuation flag is set to ON, at the same time as the end of the big hit game, the hour / hour number (for example, 100 times) is set in the hour / hour number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 and provided in the RAM 308. Turn on the short time flag. If the ordinary probability fluctuation flag is set to OFF, the number of time reductions is not set in the time reduction number storage unit, and the time reduction flag is not turned on.

  The short time here means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player in order to shorten the time from the end of the big hit in the special figure variable game to the start of the next big hit. When the time reduction flag is set to ON, the normal figure high probability state (normal figure certain change) is established. There is a higher probability of hitting in the general-game variable game in the high-probability state than in the normal-game low-probability state. In addition, in the normal figure high probability state, the fluctuation time of the general figure variable game is shorter than in the normal figure low probability state (normal figure variable short). Furthermore, in the normal high probability state, compared to the normal low probability state, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 232a of the special drawing 2 starting port 232 is likely to be longer (electrical chew extension). In addition, the pair of blade members 232a are more likely to open in the normal high probability state than in the normal low probability state. The state in which any one of these ordinary figure change, universal figure change, and electric Chu extension is set is referred to as an electric support (starting prize winning support by electric tulip) state.

  In addition, as described above, the hourly flag is set to off during the big hit game (in the special game state). Therefore, the normal low probability state is maintained during the big hit game. This is because, if the game is in a high probability state during a big hit game, a predetermined number of variable winning holes 234 and 235 will be placed in the special figure 2 start opening 232 during the big hit game until a game ball enters. There is a problem that game balls enter and the number of game balls that can be acquired during a big hit increases, resulting in an increase in euphoria. This is to solve this problem.

  If the special figure probability variation flag is set to ON, the probability variation number (for example, 10,000 times) is set in the probability variation number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 simultaneously with the end of the big hit game.

  Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end production period ends (when the production standby time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 is not activated in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set medium.

  Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is out of order, the out-of-game flag is turned on. In the case where the miss flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, special figure 2 inactive is set. In the special figure 2 state update process when the special figure 2 is not in operation, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S227.

  Subsequently, special figure state update processing (special figure 1 state update process) for special figure 1 is performed (step S227). In the special figure 1 state update process, each process described in the special figure 2 state update process is performed according to the state of the special figure 1. Each process performed in the special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” in the contents described in the special figure 2 state update process is replaced with “special figure 1”. Omitted. However, in this example, since the stop symbol form of special figure 1 is different from the stop symbol aspect of special figure 2, the timing at which the special figure 1 variable display time has elapsed (the value of the special figure 1 display symbol update timer becomes 1 to 0) The special figure 1 state update process starting at the same time) is different from the special figure 2 state update process. In the special figure 1 state update process started at the above timing, for example, when the 16R big hit flag is on and the special figure probability variation flag is on, the special figure A shown in FIG. Special figure B when figure probability fluctuation flag is off Special figure C when 2R big hit flag is on Special figure D when small hit flag is on Special figure D when special flag is on, Special figure when off flag is on E The 7 segment LED constituting the special figure 1 display device 212 is controlled to be turned on / off so as to be in each mode, and a setting indicating that the special figure 1 stop display is in progress is made in the setting area of the RAM 308. By performing this control in the special figure 1 state update process that starts at the above timing, the special figure 1 display device 212 performs a fixed display of any one of the special figures A to E. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

  When the special figure state update process in step S225 and step S227 is completed, a special figure related lottery process for each of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed. Also here, first, a special drawing related lottery process for special figure 2 (a special drawing 2 related lottery process) is performed (step S229), and then a special drawing related lottery process for special figure 1 (a special drawing 1 related lottery process). ) Is performed (step S231). In the special drawing 2 related lottery process, the floating game of the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2 is not performed, and the state of the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2 are both inactive and is held. The game is executed using the first special figure 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random number value in the special figure 2 random value storage area, starting from the fact that the number of variable games is 1 or more. The special figure 1 related lottery process does not perform the floating game of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, the state of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are both inactive, and is suspended. The game is executed using the first special figure 1 winning random number value and the special figure 1 random number value in the special figure 1 random value storage area as a starting condition that the number of variable games is 1 or more.

  Also for these special drawing related lottery processes, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery processing before the special figure 1 related lottery processing, so that the special figure 2 variable game start condition and the special figure 1 fluctuation Even if the game start conditions are satisfied at the same time, since the special figure 2 variable game is changing first, the special figure 1 variable game does not start changing. In addition, when the number of reserved special figure 2 variable games is 1 or more, the lottery process and the variable game related to the special figure 1 variable game hold are not performed. In addition, the notification of the result of the special symbol variable game success / failure determination by the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed by the first sub-control unit 400, and the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning at the special symbol 2 starting port 232 is notified. Priority is given to the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning in the special figure 1 starting port 230. In the present embodiment, a special figure variable game with a high advantage (in this example, special figure 2 variable game) is given priority over a low special figure variable game (in this example, special figure 1 variable game). . For this reason, it may be easy to give a difference in the advantage of the gaming state.

  In the case of the special figure 2 related lottery process in step S229, the main control unit 300 starts the special figure 2 start information (special) from the earliest (most previously stored) holding position in the special figure 2 random value storage area. 2), and based on the special figure 2 winning random number value in the obtained special figure 2 start information, the value of the special figure probability variation flag in the RAM 308, and the like. Is used as a big hit or a small hit (in this example, the small hit can be selected only in FIG. 1) using the determination table (see FIGS. 13A to 13D described later). Or whether it is determined to be out of place (judgment determination). Next, the main control unit 300 determines the special figure determination table stored in the ROM 306 (see FIG. ) And (b)) are used to determine the symbol (stop symbol) to be stopped and displayed after the fluctuation display of the special symbol 2. Next, the main control unit 300 is stored in the ROM 306 based on, for example, the determined success / failure determination result, the stop symbol, the special figure 2 holding number at the time of the determination, the acquired special figure variation time determination random number value, and the like. The variable display time (timer number) in FIG. 2 is determined using various tables (for example, a timer number selection table not shown).

  After fetching the first special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, the main control unit 300 deletes the first special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, 2 is subtracted from the reserved figure number 2 in the reserved number storage area. At this time, the special figure 2 start information extracted from the special figure 2 random value storage area is stored in the temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the above-described determination is performed based on the special figure 2 start information stored in the temporary area. You may do it.

  After the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) as described above, the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) is performed in the same manner.

  In the above description, the special figure 2 variable game having a high advantage is started in preference to the special figure 1 variable game having a low advantage, and the special figure 2 hold is prioritized over the special figure 1 hold. Special figure 2 priority fluctuation is given as an example, but special figure 1 variable game with low advantage is started over special figure 2 variable game with high advantage, and special figure 1 suspension is The special figure 1 priority fluctuation | variation digested preferentially over hold may be sufficient. In addition, priority is not given to special figure 2 variable game with high advantage and special figure 1 variable game with low advantage. The start opening winning order variation may be started in order. In the starting order winning order variation, the upper limit number of holds is 8 regardless of the special figures 1 and 2, and compared with the priority fluctuation in which the upper limit number of holds is 4 in each of the special figures 1 and 2 In some cases, the upper limit of the number of holds can be increased.

  In the above description, it is assumed that the lottery process and the variable game relating to the holding of the other special figure are not performed according to the state of the special figure, but the invention is not limited to this, and the special figure state update described above is not performed. The process and the special figure-related lottery process may be performed independently in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, respectively, so that a plurality of special figures may be changed simultaneously. In addition, when a plurality of special figures are changed at the same time, a plurality of areas for displaying the lottery results of each special figure are provided on the decorative symbol display device 208 or the lottery results of each special figure are displayed. A plurality of decorative symbol display devices may be provided, and each lottery result may be displayed separately, or one display may be configured to display lottery results of a plurality of special drawings. In addition, when changes related to a plurality of special figures are performed simultaneously, the lottery result of the special figure that stopped the fluctuation may affect the lottery result of the special figure that stops the fluctuation later.

  In step S233 following step S231, command setting transmission processing is performed. In this command setting transmission process, various commands are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of 16 bits, for example, bit 15 is strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bits 11 to 14 are Command type (in this embodiment, basic command, symbol variation start command, symbol variation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot round number designation command, power recovery command, RAM clear command, prefetch result information command Information that can specify the type of command, etc.), bits 0 to 10 are constituted by command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type).

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on or off by the command transmission process described above. If the command type is a symbol variation start (rotation start) command, the command data includes various big hit flags, small hit flags, a break flag, special figure probability fluctuation flag values, and a timer selected by special drawing related lottery processing. In the case of a symbol variation stop (rotation stop) command including information indicating a number, etc., including a value of various big hit flags, a small hit flag, a loss flag, a special figure probability variation flag, etc., and a winning effect start command and an end In the case of the production start command, the value of the special figure probability variation flag is included, and in the case of the big hit round number designation command, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the big hit number of rounds, and the like are included. When the command type indicates a basic command, device information in the command data, presence / absence of winning in the special figure 1 starting port 230, presence / absence of winning in the special figure 2 starting port 232, winning in the variable winning ports 234 and 235 Includes presence or absence. In the case of a prefetch result information command, information such as the types of special figure 1 and special figure 2, the number of prefetches stored in a prefetch number storage area, which will be described later, and a stop symbol stored in the prefetch result storage unit are used as command data. Including.

  In the rotation start setting transmission process described above, the command data is stored in the RAM 308 as various big hit flags, small hit flags, off-set flags, special figure probability variation flag values, special figure related lottery processes, and special figures. 2. Information indicating the timer number selected in the related lottery process, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game, etc., which are put on hold is set. In the rotation stop setting transmission process described above, information indicating values of various big hit flags, small hit flags, loss flags, special figure probability variation flags, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data.

  In the winning effect setting transmission process described above, the command control data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period, the special figure probability variation flag Information indicating the value, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game being held, etc. is set. In the above-described end effect setting transmission process, the command control data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period, the special figure probability variation flag Information indicating the value, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game being held, etc. is set. In the above-described special winning opening release setting transmission process, the command data includes the number of big hits stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game held. Set the information that indicates. In the above-mentioned special winning opening closing setting transmission process, the command data includes the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game held. Set the information that indicates.

  In step S233, general command special figure hold increase processing is also performed. In this general command special figure pending increase process, special figure identification information (information showing special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308, command notice information (preliminary notice information, false) Set either advance notice information or no advance notice information).

  In the first sub-control unit 400, it is possible to determine the production control according to the change of the game control in the main control unit 300 by the command type included in the received output schedule information, and it is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, the contents of effect control can be determined.

  In step S235 following step S233, external output signal setting processing is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

  In step S237 following step S235, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of the various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read, and the presence or absence of a predetermined error, for example, the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or the presence or absence of a bottom pan full error is monitored. . When a front frame door open error or a lower pan full error is detected, the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 includes device information indicating whether there is a front frame door open error or a lower pan full error. Set. Further, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening / closing of the special figure 2 starting port 232 and the variable prize opening 234, and the general diagram display device 210, the special diagram 1 display device 212, and the like via the drive circuits 324, 326, 330. Display data to be output to the special figure 2 display device 214, various status display units 328, and the like is set in the output port of the I / O 310. Further, the output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the payout control unit 600 via the output port of the I / O 310.

  In step S239 following step S237, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is ON. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when power supply cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and when the low voltage signal is off (when power supply cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241. In step S241, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is set in each original register, interrupt permission is set, etc., and then the main control unit main process shown in FIG. Return to. On the other hand, in step S243, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the power-off state at the time of power recovery is saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 as return data, and power-off processing such as initialization of input / output ports is performed. After that, the process returns to the main process of the main control unit shown in FIG.

  FIG. 8 is a flowchart showing an example of the flow of the special figure prefetching process executed in the winning acceptance process (step S217) of the main control unit timer interruption process. In the special figure prefetching process, the main control unit 300 prefetches the start information increased in each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, predetermines the stop symbol before the success / failure judgment process, and obtains a predetermination result (special The figure prefetching result) and the special figure variation time are stored in the prefetching result storage unit in the RAM 308 (see FIGS. 9A to 9C).

  Here, in the RAM 308, the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit for storing the special figure 1 prefetch result and the number of special figure 1 prefetch results stored in the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit are specially displayed. A special figure 1 pre-reading number storage area for storing as one pre-reading number is provided. The prefetch result storage unit for special figure 1 can store up to four prefetch results in this example. In the special figure 1 prefetching result storage unit, every time the number of special figure 1 prefetching decreases by one, the data of the special figure 1 prefetching result with the highest rank (first) is erased and the remaining special figure 1 prefetching result Are processed so that the rank of the data is incremented by one. Each time the special figure 1 prefetch number increases by one, new special figure 1 prefetch result data is written in the next rank of the special figure 1 prefetch result data of the lowest rank (last).

  Also, in the RAM 308, the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit for storing the special figure 2 prefetch result and the number of special figure 2 prefetch results stored in the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit are stored in the special figure 2 prefetch. A special figure 2 pre-reading number storage area for storing numbers is provided. The prefetch result storage unit for special figure 2 can store up to four prefetch results in this example. In the special figure 2 prefetching result storage unit, every time the number of special figure 2 prefetching decreases by one, the data of the special figure 2 prefetching result having the highest rank is deleted and the order of the remaining special figure 2 prefetching result data Are processed so that they are incremented by one. Each time the special figure 2 prefetch number increases by one, new special figure 2 prefetch result data is written in the next rank of the special figure 2 prefetch data having the lowest rank.

  In the special figure prefetching process, first, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the startup information of the special figure 2 has increased (step S301). The determination as to whether or not the start information of the special figure 2 has increased is stored in, for example, the special figure 2 hold number stored in the special figure 2 hold number storage area and the special figure 2 prefetch number storage area. Special figure 2 Compared with the number of pre-reads. The main control unit 300 determines that the start information of the special figure 2 has increased when the special figure 2 hold number is larger than the special figure 2 prefetch number, and the special figure 2 hold number is the special figure 2 prefetch number. If they are equal, it is determined that the starting information in FIG. 2 has not increased. If it is determined that the starting information of FIG. 2 has increased, the process proceeds to step S303, and if it is determined that the starting information of FIG. 2 has not increased, the process proceeds to step S307.

  In step S303, the increased special figure 2 starting information (a special figure 2 winning random value and a set of special figure 2 random values) is processed before the success / failure determination process in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229). FIG. 2 Read ahead from the random value storage area. Then, using the pre-read special figure 2 start information and the determination table for special determination 2 and the special figure determination table used at the time of determination, for example, the special figure 2 variable game stop symbol related to the start information is selected. Prior determination is made before the success / failure determination process in the process (step S229). Note that this pre-determination process may be performed using a special table for pre-determination instead of the table used at the time of determination. Further, in step S303, the timer group (see FIG. 15) of the special figure 2 variable game related to the start information may be determined in advance using the information on the stop symbol determined in advance and a predetermined timer number selection table. Good.

  In step S305 subsequent to step S303, stop symbol information and timer group information as special figure 2 prefetching results obtained in advance determination are stored in the earliest free area of the special figure 2 prefetching result storage unit in the RAM 308. To do. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S307.

  In step S307, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the start information in FIG. 1 has increased. Whether or not the starting information of the special figure 1 has increased is determined by, for example, the special figure 1 holding number stored in the special figure 1 holding number storage area and the special figure 1 pre-reading number storage as in the special figure 2. The comparison is made with the special figure 1 prefetch number stored in the area. If it is determined that the start information of FIG. 1 has increased, the process proceeds to step S309, and if it is determined that the start information of FIG. Return to timer interrupt processing.

  In step S309, it is determined based on various flags in the RAM 308 whether or not non-electric support is in progress. If it is determined that the non-electric support is being performed, the process proceeds to step S311. If it is determined that the non-electric support is not being performed, the process proceeds to step S315. In this example, it is determined whether or not non-electric support is being performed, but it may be determined whether or not the execution condition of the special figure 1 prefetch notice is satisfied. For example, the execution conditions of the special figure 1 pre-reading notice include conditions such as not being in a big hit game other than being in non-electric support.

  In step S311, the increased special figure 1 start information (a special figure 1 winning random value and a pair of special figure 1 random value) is processed before the success determination process in the special figure 1 lottery process (step S231). FIG. 1 Read ahead from the random value storage area. Then, using the pre-read special figure 1 start information and the determination table for special determination and the special figure determination table used at the time of determination, for example, the special figure 1 variable game stop symbol related to the start information is selected as the special figure 1 related lottery. Prior determination is made before the success / failure determination process in the process (step S231). Note that this pre-determination process may be performed using a special table for pre-determination instead of the table used at the time of determination. Further, in step S311, the timer group (see FIG. 15) of the special figure 1 variable game related to the start information may be determined in advance using information on the stop symbol determined in advance and a predetermined timer number selection table. Good.

  In step S313 subsequent to step S311, the stop symbol information and timer group information as the special figure 1 prefetching result obtained in the prior determination is stored in the earliest free area of the special figure 1 prefetching result storage unit in the RAM 308. To do. Thereafter, the special figure prefetch process is terminated and the process returns to the main control unit timer interrupt process.

  In step S315, the pre-read result for pre-Fig. 1 is stored in the RAM 308 in place of the stop symbol information, instead of pre-reading the start-up information without pre-reading the increased special Fig. 1 start information. Stored in the earliest free area of the copy. Thereafter, the special figure prefetch process is terminated and the process returns to the main control unit timer interrupt process.

  In the present embodiment, only the increased start information is pre-read and pre-determined. However, all start information may be pre-read and pre-determined. Further, in the above-described command setting transmission process (step S233), only the pre-read result of the starting information for the increase may be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, or the pre-read result storage for special figure 1 and special figure 2 All the prefetching results in the section may be transmitted to the first sub-control section 400.

  Further, in the flowchart shown in FIG. 8, pre-reading is always executed for the increased start information of Special Figure 2, and pre-read is always executed for the increased start information of Special Figure 1 except during the electric support. However, it may be determined by lottery whether or not to pre-read the increased starting information of FIG. 1 and FIG. Alternatively, in the first sub-control unit 400 that has received the prefetch result from the main control unit 300, for example, it may be determined by lottery whether to perform prefetch notification for each hold. Regardless of the gaming state (for example, whether or not non-electric support is in progress), when the starting information increases, prefetching is always executed and the prefetching result is stored in the prefetching result storage unit, and the prefetching result May be configured to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 may be configured to determine whether to perform lottery and presentation using the prefetch result. Further, the start information and the prefetch result of each special figure may be stored in one start information and the prefetch result storage unit without providing an area for storing the start information and the prefetch result for each special figure. good. In addition, pre-reading is always executed for the increased starting information of FIG. 1, and the main control unit 300 performs the first sub-control unit 400 in a period other than a specific period (for example, during the electric support or during the jackpot game). The pre-reading result may be transmitted to the main control unit 300 so that the pre-fetching result is not transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 during a specific period.

  FIG. 9 illustrates a state in which prefetch result information and the like are stored in the prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308. FIG. 9A shows an example of a state in which the special figure 1 prefetch result information is stored in the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 9 (a), the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit has, for example, the same number (four in this embodiment) of storage areas as the special figure 1 variable game holdable number. . Each storage area is associated with the hold order (hold 1 to hold 4) of the special figure 1 random value storage area. In each of the storage areas, the stop symbol information of Special Figure 1 is stored. In the example shown in FIG. 9A, “special symbol E” (out of line) is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area “hold 1”, and “special symbol E” is stored as stop symbol information in the storage region “hold 2”. "(Out of line)" is stored, "Special Figure C" (2R jackpot) is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area "Hold 3", and "Special Figure E" is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area "Hold 4" (Outgoing) is stored.

  FIG. 9B shows an example of a state in which the special figure 2 prefetch result information is stored in the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 9B, the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit has, for example, the same number (4 in the present embodiment) of storage areas as the number of special figure variable games that can be held. . Each storage area is associated with the hold order (hold 1 to hold 4) of the special figure 2 random value storage area. In each of the storage areas, stop symbol information and timer group information of Special Figure 2 are stored. In the example shown in FIG. 9B, the storage area “hold 1” stores “special drawing d” (disconnected) as stop symbol information, “timer group 1” as timer group information, and the storage area “hold 2”. Is stored with “Special Figure d” (out) as the stop symbol information, “Timer Group 1” as the timer group information, and “Special Figure d” (out) as the stop symbol information in the storage area “Pending 3”. “Timer group 2” is stored as group information, “special a” (16R special jackpot) is stored as stop symbol information, and “timer group 7” is stored as timer group information in the storage area “hold 4”.

  In the above-described step S303, when it is determined in advance whether the determination result is a variation timer number (variation time), presence / absence of reach production, or the like, such information may be stored in the prefetch result storage unit for special figure 2.

  Also in FIG. 1, when it is determined in advance in step S311 that the result is a success / failure determination, timer group, variable timer number (variable time), presence / absence of reach effect, etc., the information is pre-read for special figure 1. You may memorize | store in a result memory | storage part. The main control unit 300 stores the pre-determined information in the prefetch result storage unit and transmits it to the first sub control unit 400 as prefetch result information.

  FIG. 9 (c) shows an example of the prefetch result storage unit for special figure 1 during the electric support. In the present embodiment, the start information of FIG. 1 is not prefetched during the electric support. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 9C, the storage area “hold 1” stores “undecided” information indicating that the start information of the special figure 1 has not been pre-read in place of the stop symbol information. ing. In the storage areas “hold 2” to “hold 4”, neither stop symbol information nor undetermined information is stored. In FIG. 9C, a state in which neither stop symbol information nor undetermined information is stored in the storage area is described as “none”.

  Next, processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 10 and 11. First, the main process of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 10A is a flowchart showing a flow of main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400.

  In step S401, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S401. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

  In step S403 following step S401, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S405. . In step S405, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

  In step S407 following step S405, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

  In step S409 following step S407, an effect control process is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S407, processing such as reading the effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and when the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated. Details of the effect control process will be described later.

  In step S411 following step S409, a chance button control process is performed. In the chance button control process, when the pressing of the chance button 136 is detected, the effect data updated in step S409 is changed to the effect data corresponding to the pressing of the chance button 136.

  In step S413 subsequent to step S411, image control processing is performed. In the image control process, when there is a command to the VDP 434 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the VDP 434 (details will be described later).

  In step S415 following step S413, sound control processing is performed. In the sound control process, if there is a command to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the sound source IC 416.

  In step S417 following step S415, lamp control processing is performed. In the lamp control process, if there is a command to various lamps 418 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the drive circuit 420.

  In step S419 following step S417, shutter control processing is performed. In the shutter control process, if there is a command to the shielding device 246 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the drive circuit 432.

  In step S421 following step S419, information transmission processing is performed. In the information transmission process, when there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read in step S409, a setting is made to output this control command. Thereafter, the process returns to step S403.

  Next, the command reception interrupt process (strobe interrupt process) of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 10B is a flowchart showing the flow of the first sub control unit command reception interrupt process (strobe interrupt process) executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal from the main control unit 300. In step S501 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the main control unit 300 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408 as an unprocessed command.

  Next, the timer interrupt process of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 10C is a flowchart showing the flow of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this example, once every 2 ms). The timer interrupt process is triggered by this timer interrupt. Run in cycles. In step S601 of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S403 of the first sub control unit main process, and the result is stored in the original timer variable storage area. To do. Therefore, in step S403, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

  In step S603 following step S601, a control command is transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 set in the information transmission process (step S421) of the first sub-control unit main process, and other random number values for effects are updated. Etc.

  Next, the effect control process in step S409 in the main process of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 10D is a flowchart illustrating an example of the flow of the effect control process in step S409 of the first sub control unit main process.

  In step S701 of the effect control process, an icon display control process is performed. Details of the icon display control process will be described later. It should be noted that the icon display control process may be executed independently in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, or may be executed in common in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2.

  In step S703 following step S701, other effect control processing is performed.

  Next, the image control process in step S413 in the main process of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 10E is a flowchart illustrating the flow of the image control process.

  In step S801, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 404 first swaps the designation of the display areas A and B in the VRAM 436. As a result, an image of one frame stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative design display device 208. Next, the CPU 404 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 406), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 436) and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 434 based on the position information table and the like, and then the image from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 434 transfers the image data from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436 based on the command set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 434 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 404.

  In step S803 following step S801, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 has been input. If a transfer end interrupt signal has been input, the process proceeds to step S805. Wait for the input signal to be input. In step S805, parameters are set based on the production scenario configuration table and attribute data. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 436 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 436 in step S801, the CPU 404 information on the image data constituting the display image (coordinate axes and image sizes of the VRAM 436). , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates, etc.) are instructed to the VDP 434. The VDP 434 sets parameters according to attributes based on instructions stored in the attribute register.

  In step S807 following step S805, a drawing instruction is performed. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 404 instructs the VDP 434 to start drawing an image. The VDP 434 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer in accordance with an instruction from the CPU 404.

  In step S809 following step S807, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 based on the end of image drawing has been input. If a generation end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S811, and if not, Waits for the generation end interrupt signal to be input. In step S811, a scene display counter that is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 and counts how many scene images have been generated is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

  Next, the icon display control process of step S701 in the effect control process of the main process of the first sub-control unit 400 will be described using FIG. It is assumed that the icons include a hold icon that displays the number of special figure variable games held (the number of active holding balls) and a change icon that is displayed during execution of the special figure variable game. FIG. 11 is a flowchart showing the flow of the icon effect control process. In the icon display control process shown in FIG. 11, the display of the hold icon and the change icon is controlled.

  In step S901 of the icon display control process, it is determined whether or not a command including new prefetch result information is received from the main control unit 300. A command is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400 every time a game ball is awarded to the special drawing 1 and special drawing 2 starting ports 230 and 232. When it is determined that the command includes new prefetch result information, the process proceeds to step S903, and when it is determined that the command does not include new prefetch result information, the process proceeds to step S913.

  In step S903 following step S901, it is determined whether or not there is an icon whose display mode is being changed. For example, the special figure 1 and special figure 2 pre-reading notice execution flag values stored in a predetermined storage area of the RAM 408 are read out, and if both the values are "0", the special figure 1 and special figure 2 are read. It is determined that the pre-reading notice execution flag is off, and it is determined that there is no icon whose display mode is being changed. Further, if at least one of the special figure 1 and special figure 2 pre-reading notice execution flag values is "1", it is determined that either the special figure 1 or special figure 2 pre-reading notice execution flag is on. It is determined that there is an icon whose display mode is being changed. If it is determined that there is no icon whose display mode is being changed, the process proceeds to step S905. If it is determined that there is an icon whose display mode is being changed, the process proceeds to step S911.

  In step S905 subsequent to step S903, it is determined whether an icon display mode change condition is satisfied. For example, when the lottery for determining whether or not the pre-reading notice is executed is won, it is determined that the condition for changing the icon display mode is satisfied and the process proceeds to step S907, and when the lottery for determining whether or not the pre-reading notice is executed is not won. Then, it is determined that the icon display mode change condition is not satisfied, and the process proceeds to step S911.

  In step S907 following step S905, an icon change scenario lottery process is performed. In the icon change scenario lottery process, referring to an icon display mode lottery table (FIGS. 16 to 17) to be described later, the number of special figure variable games held, the timer group corresponding to the increased hold, and the icon display mode lottery Based on the random number value, an icon change scenario between the hold icon and the change icon for the increased hold and the existing hold is determined by lottery.

  In step S909 subsequent to step S907, the icon change scenario determined by the icon change scenario lottery process is stored in a scenario storage area provided in the RAM 408. The scenario storage area in the RAM 408 has the same number of storage areas as the number of reserves for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 (in this example, four for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2). Yes. Each storage area is associated with each of the holding ranks (holding 1 to holding 4) of FIG. 1 and FIG. For example, when the first hold in FIG. 1 is consumed and the special figure 1 variable game is started, the data (icon change scenario) in the storage area corresponding to the hold 1 in FIG. The data in the storage area corresponding to .about.hold 4 is moved up and stored again in the storage areas corresponding to .about.hold 1 to hold 3. FIG.

  On the other hand, in step S911 following steps S903 and S905, the display mode of the hold icon corresponding to the increased hold is set to the default display mode. In this example, a white circular image is set as the default display mode.

  In step S913 subsequent to steps S909 and S911, a process of displaying a hold icon corresponding to the increased hold in a predetermined display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 (for example, including a process of setting an increase animation of the hold icon). Do.

  In step S915 following step S913, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved memory for the special figure variable game has decreased. For example, when it is determined that the number of reserved memories has decreased based on the symbol variation start command, the prefetch result information command, etc. from the main control unit 300, the process proceeds to step S917, and it is determined that the number of reserved memories has not decreased. Then, the process proceeds to step S919.

  In step S917 following step S915, a hold icon display position change process is performed. In the hold icon display position change process, a process for changing the display position of each hold icon in accordance with the decrease in the number of holds (for example, a movement animation or deletion animation of the hold icon, a movement animation between the hold / change icon, etc. is set). Process). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S919.

  In step S919 following step S917, it is determined whether an icon change condition is satisfied. The icon change condition is, for example, that a special figure variation game is started. In this example, it is determined that the icon change condition is satisfied if it is a timing at which a command indicating the start of a special figure change game such as a symbol change start command is received from the main control unit 300, and otherwise, the icon change condition is It is determined that it is not established. If it is determined that the icon change condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S921. If it is determined that the icon change condition is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S923. In addition, the icon change condition may be that a predetermined fluctuation time has elapsed, a winning symbol stop display, or a predetermined operation of the chance button 136 by the player.

  In step S921 following step S919, processing for changing the icon display mode is performed based on the stored scenario.

  In step 923 following step S921, it is determined whether an icon display end condition is satisfied. The icon display end condition is, for example, that the special figure variable game has ended. In this example, it is determined that the icon display end condition is satisfied if it is a timing at which a command indicating the end of the special figure variable game such as a symbol change stop command is received from the main control unit 300, and if not, the icon display is ended. It is determined that the condition is not satisfied. If it is determined that the icon display end condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S925. If it is determined that the icon display end condition is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S927.

  In step S925 following step S923, a corresponding icon display end process is performed. In the icon display end process, a process for erasing the variable icon for ending the display on the decorative symbol display device 208 (for example, including a process for setting a deletion animation of the variable icon) is performed.

  In step S927, other hold icon display processing is executed. Thereafter, the icon display control process is terminated and the process returns to the effect control process.

  In the icon display control process of this example, a new look-ahead result is added to the command transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub-control unit 400 every time a game ball is won in the special figure 1 and special figure 2 starting ports 230 and 232. When it is determined that the information is included (Yes in step S901), steps S903 to S909 are executed, and the display mode of the icon to be notified is changed. The icon display control process is not at the time of winning a game ball to the special figure 1 and special figure 2 starting openings 230 and 232, but for example, a predetermined time has elapsed since the hold icon already displayed in the default display mode is displayed. The display mode of the hold icon may be changed to a display mode other than the default later.

  Further, in the icon display control process of this example, when it is determined that there is an icon whose display mode is being changed (No in step S905), step S911 is executed, and the display mode of the hold icon corresponding to the increased hold is defaulted. The display mode is set to restrict the change of the icon display mode. In the icon display control process of this example, for example, when the special figure variable game that is a big hit is put on hold before the hold corresponding to the pre-reading notice result of the increased start information, the icon display mode is changed. You may make it regulate.

  Next, processing of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. First, the main process of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500.

  In step S1001, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S1001. In this initialization processing, initial setting of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 508, and the like are performed.

  In step S1003 following step S1001, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more. This process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S1005. . In step S1005, 0 is substituted for the timer variable.

  In step S1007 following step S1005, command processing is performed. The CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 determines whether a command has been received from the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400.

  In step S1009 following step S1007, an effect control process is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S1007, a process such as reading the effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 506 is performed, and when the effect data needs to be updated, an effect data update process is performed.

  In step S1011 following step S1009, if there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the game board lamp 532 or the game table frame lamp 542, this command is output to the serial communication control circuit 520.

  In step S1013 following step S1011, if there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the effect movable body 224, this command is output to the drive circuit 516, and the process returns to step S1003.

  Next, a command reception interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing of the second sub control unit 500. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub control unit 500 detects the strobe signal output from the first sub control unit 400. In step S1101 of the command reception interrupt process, the command output from the first sub-control unit 400 is stored as an unprocessed command in a command storage area provided in the RAM 508.

  Next, the second sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 12C is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process of the second sub control unit 500. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this embodiment, once every 2 ms), and a timer interrupt process is performed in response to this timer interrupt. Execute in the cycle. In step S1201 of the second sub control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S1003 in the second sub control unit main process shown in FIG. Is stored in the timer variable storage area. Accordingly, in step S1003, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S1203 of the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process, an effect random number update process is performed.

  Next, various tables used in the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described. Various tables shown in FIGS. 13 to 15 are stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300, for example. FIGS. 13A to 13D show an example of the determination table used for determining whether or not the lottery process is related to the special figure 2 lottery process (step S229) or the special figure 1 lottery process (step S231). Yes. The success / failure determination table shown in FIGS. 13A to 13D includes items of “special figure probability”, “random number range”, and “correction determination result”. The item “special figure probability” indicates a special figure probability (special figure low probability or special figure high probability) at the time of determination of success or failure. The item “random number range” indicates a numerical range to be compared with the acquired special figure 2 winning random value or the special figure 1 winning random value. The possible range of the special figure 2 winning random value and the special figure 1 winning random value of this example is 0 to 65535 (the range of the numerical value range is 65536).

  The success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 13 (a) is a success / failure determination table for special figure 1 used when the special figure probability at the time of success / failure determination is low. As shown in FIG. 13A, when this success / failure determination table is used, the big hit probability is about 1/299 (= 219/65536), and the small hit probability is about 1/399 (= 164). / 65536).

  The success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 13 (b) is a success / failure determination table for special figure 1 that is used when the special figure probability at the time of success / failure determination is high. As shown in FIG. 13B, when this success / failure determination table is used, the probability of big hit is about 1/30 (= 2185/65536), and the probability of small hit is about 1/399. When this success / failure determination table is compared with the success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 13A, the big hit probability is about 10 times, and the small hit probability is the same.

  The success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 13C is a success / failure determination table for special figure 2 that is used when the special figure probability at the time of success / failure determination is low. As shown in FIG. 13C, when this success / failure determination table is used, the probability of jackpot is about 1/299. Note that, as shown in FIG. 5B, the special figure 2 is not provided with a small hit.

  The success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 13 (d) is a success / failure determination table for special figure 2 that is used when the special figure probability at the time of success / failure determination is high. As shown in FIG. 13D, when this success / failure determination table is used, the probability of big hit is about 1/30, and the probability of small hit is 0. When this success / failure determination table is compared with the success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 13 (c), the probability of jackpot is about 10 times.

  FIGS. 14A and 14B are examples of a special figure determination table used when determining a stop symbol in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) or the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231). Show. The special figure determination table shown in FIGS. 14 (a) and 14 (b) is composed of items of “result determination / non-rejection determination”, “random number range”, and “stop symbol”. The item of “random number range” indicates a numerical range to be compared with the acquired special figure 2 random value or special figure 1 random value. The possible range of the special figure 2 random value and the special figure 1 random value in this example is 0 to 99 (the width of the numerical range is 100).

  FIG. 14A shows a special figure determination table for special figure 1. As shown in FIG. 14 (a), in the special figure 1 variable game of this example, the distribution ratio of each big hit symbol is 25% for special figure A (16R special big hit) and 25% for special figure B (16R big hit). %, And special figure C (sudden probability change) is 50%. The ratio of probability change jackpots (Special Figure A, Special Figure C) in the special figure 1 variable game jackpot, that is, the probability change probability is 75%. Further, the round ratio in the jackpot of the special figure 1 variable game is 50% for 16R and 50% for 2R.

  In this embodiment, since there is only one kind of small hit symbol of special figure 1, if the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful, the stop symbol is special regardless of the special figure 1 random value. D is determined. Also, since there is only one type of missed symbol, when the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is a special symbol E regardless of the special figure 1 random value. In FIG. 1, a plurality of types of small hit symbols and outlier symbols may be provided, and another symbol may be determined based on the result of random number lottery.

  FIG. 14B shows a special figure determination table for special figure 2. As shown in FIG. 14 (b), in the special figure 2 variable game of this example, the distribution ratio of each big hit symbol is 70% for special figure a (16R special big hit), and special figure b (8R special big hit) is 5%, and special figure c (8R big hit) is 25%. The ratio of probability variation jackpots (special figure a, special figure b) in the jackpot of the special figure 2 variable game, that is, the probability variation probability is 75% as in FIG. Moreover, the round ratio in the jackpot of the special figure 2 variable game is 70% for 16R and 30% for 8R.

  In the present embodiment, since there is only one type of out-of-order symbol in special figure 2, if the result of determining whether or not the special figure 2 variable game is correct is out of order, the stop symbol becomes special figure d regardless of the special figure 2 random value. It is determined. In FIG. 2, it is also possible to provide a plurality of different symbols and determine another symbol based on the result of random lottery.

  FIG. 15 shows an example of a variation time of each variation timer for each timer number, a timer group to which each variation timer belongs, and an effect type that can be executed during the variation time using each variation timer. The table shown in FIG. 15 includes items “timer group”, “timer number”, “variation time [ms]”, and “effect type (executable effect type)” from the left column.

  As shown in FIG. 15, “timer group” includes “timer group 1”, “timer group 2”, “timer group 3”, “timer group 4”, “timer group 5”, “timer group 6” and “timer group 6”. It is divided into seven timer groups 7 ”. “Timer group 1” has the shortest variation time, and the determination result is out of date. “Timer group 2” and “timer group 3” are sections with relatively short fluctuation times. “Timer group 4” and “timer group 5” are divided into medium fluctuation times. “Timer group 6” and “timer group 7” are sections with relatively long fluctuation times.

  The “timer number” on the right side of the “timer group” diagram indicates the timer number for determining the symbol variation time in the special symbol variation game. “Variation time [ms]” on the right side of the “Timer number” diagram indicates the symbol variation time in the special figure variation game corresponding to the timer number. “Timer 1” to “Timer 5” belong to “Timer group 1” (immediately out of sync), “Timer 6” to “Timer 7” belong to “Timer group 2” (variation time: short), “Timer 8” to “Timer 10” belong to “Timer group 3” (variation time: short), “Timer 11” to “Timer 13” belong to “Timer group 4” (variation time: Medium), and “Timer 14 ”to“ timer 15 ”belong to“ timer group 5 ”(variation time: medium),“ timer 16 ”to“ timer 17 ”belong to“ timer group 6 ”(variation time: long), and“ timer 18 ”. ~ "Timer 22" belongs to "Timer group 7" (variation time: long).

  The “variation type (executable effect type)” on the right side of the “variation time [ms]” diagram is the type of variation of the special figure variation game corresponding to the selected timer number and variation time [ms] ( The type of production). In this example, the reach effect is not executed in the variable time (within 1000 ms) belonging to the timer group 1 (immediately offset system), and the reach effect is executed in the variable time belonging to the timer groups 2 to 7. Further, the reach effect of the super reach can be executed in the variable time belonging to the timer groups 4 to 7 having the medium variable time or more. In the longest fluctuation time (300000 [ms], timer 22), reach effect of full rotation can be executed.

  The “pseudo-continuous” shown in FIG. 15 indicates that a combination of symbols corresponding to the disengagement is stopped and displayed using the decorative symbol display device 208 during one special symbol variation display, and the decorative symbol fluctuates a plurality of times. This is a pseudo-variation that looks like this: “pseudo-continuous once” means that a single pseudo-variation is performed during one-time variation display of a special figure, and “pseudo-continuous twice” means 1 It is to perform two pseudo fluctuations during the display of the fluctuation of the special figure of the second time.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is configured such that when Super Reach B is executed, the swordsman confrontation where Yoshimune confronts the swordsman is performed using the decorative symbol display device 208 or the like.

  In addition, timers 1 to 5 (timer group 1), timers 6 to 7 (timer group 2), timers 11 to 13 (timer group 4), and timers 16 to 17 (timer group 6) have a determination result of whether or not the change is appropriate. It is a variation timer that is selected when it is out of place, and timers 8 to 10 (timer group 3), timers 14 to 15 (timer group 5), and timers 18 to 22 (timer group 7) It is a variable timer that is selected when is a win. When comparing variation timers that can execute the same effect type, the variation timer that is selected at the time of winning is more variable than the variation timer that is selected at the time of losing so that the winning effect can be executed after the symbol stop display. Is longer by a predetermined time (for example, 10000 [ms]). For example, when comparing the timer 6 and the timer 9 capable of producing a normal reach, the timer 9 selected at the time of winning has a fluctuation time of 10,000 ms longer than the timer 6 selected at the time of loss. In the special figure variable game in which the timer 6 is selected and the special figure variable game in which the timer 9 is selected, the normal reach effect in the same manner is possible until immediately before the symbol stops, and in the special figure variable game in which the timer 9 is selected, the symbol A predetermined winning game can be executed after the stop.

  Note that the timer number and the effect type do not necessarily correspond one-on-one, and a plurality of effect modes may be provided for one timer number. For example, when a certain timer number is selected, in the effect control process of the first sub-control unit 400 or the second sub-control unit 500, determination based on a predetermined condition, lottery using a random number for effects, etc. are performed, You may make it select the production | presentation aspect performed with the change time of the said timer number from several production | presentation aspects. In addition, even if the timer numbers (variation times) are different, it may be possible to provide an effect type such that some aspects are common.

  Further, in this example, when timers 6 to 22 (timer groups 2 to 7) are selected, an effect more than reach is executed, but whether or not an effect more than reach is executed is not necessarily a timer. There is no need to rely on numbers. For example, the lottery of the timer number and the lottery for determining whether or not to perform the effect of reach or more may be performed independently. The lottery for determining whether or not to perform the reach or more may be performed by the main control unit 300 or the first sub-control unit 400.

  Next, the icon display mode lottery table will be described with reference to FIGS. 16 and 17. The tables shown in FIGS. 16 and 17 are used in the icon change scenario lottery process (step S907) of the icon display control process. The tables shown in FIGS. 16 and 17 are stored in the ROM 406 of the first sub control unit 400, for example.

  FIG. 16 shows an example of the notice object display mode lottery table for the notice of the increased fourth hold when the hold number at the time of winning is 3 (when the hold number is increased from 3 to 4). Show. FIG. 16 shows an example of a notice object icon display mode lottery table used when the hold icon corresponding to the pre-reading notice is a “sphere system” displayed in a circular image display form.

  The notice target icon display mode lottery table shown in FIG. 16 includes items “scenario No.”, “icon display mode”, and “timer group” from the left column. In this example, scenario no. Nineteen types of icon change scenarios 1 to 19 are provided.

  The item “icon display mode” on the right side of the “scenario No.” item in the figure is the column “icon display mode”, and in order from the right in the figure, “when winning”, “after 1 change”, It is divided into five sub-columns: “After 2 changes”, “After 3 changes”, and “At change”. “At the time of winning a prize” indicates a display mode of a hold icon corresponding to the hold of the notice target at the time of the hold prize of the notice target. “After 1 change” indicates the display mode of the hold icon to be notified in advance after 1 change from the winning. “After 2 changes” indicates a display mode of the hold icon to be notified in advance after 2 changes from the winning. “After 3 changes” indicates the display mode of the hold icon to be notified in advance after 3 changes from the winning. “At the time of change” indicates a display mode of a change icon displayed during execution of the special figure change game to be notified.

  The timing for changing the icon display mode based on each scenario may be the same as the start of each change, or may be after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of each change, or after the start of each change. It may be when the operation is performed.

  In each sub-column of “icon display mode” in FIG. 16, “white” indicates that the icon display mode is a white circular image, and “blue” indicates that the icon display mode is a blue circular image. "Green" indicates that the icon display mode is a green circular image, "red" indicates that the icon display mode is a red circular image, and "family crest" indicates the icon The display mode indicates that the image represents a family crest, and “-” indicates that the display mode of the hold icon set before is maintained.

  For example, scenario no. If 6 is selected, the “blue” display mode at the time of winning a prize, the “green” display mode after 1 variation, the “green” display mode after 2 variations, the “green” display mode after 3 variations, the hold icon in the “green” display mode Are displayed, indicating that the variation icon is displayed in a “green” display mode at the time of variation. Scenario No. When 11 is selected, the “blue” display mode at the time of winning a prize, the “green” display mode after 1 variation, the “red” display mode after 2 variations, the “red” display mode after 3 variations, the hold icon Are displayed, indicating that the fluctuation icon is displayed in a “red” display mode at the time of fluctuation. Scenario No. When 14 is selected, the “red” display mode at the time of winning a prize, the “red” display mode after 1 variation, the “red” display mode after 2 variations, the “red” display mode after 3 variations, the hold icon Are displayed, indicating that the fluctuation icon is displayed in a “red” display mode at the time of fluctuation.

  The “timer group” on the right side of the “icon display mode” is divided into seven sub-columns by the timer group shown in FIG. “1” indicates timer group 1, “2” indicates timer group 2, “3” indicates timer group 3, “4” indicates timer group 4, and “5” indicates timer group 2. “6” indicates timer group 6, and “7” indicates timer group 7.

  In the icon change scenario lottery process (step S907), using the notice target icon display mode lottery table, the notice target is displayed based on the timer group to which the increased variable timer of suspension belongs and the random number value for the notice target icon display mode lottery. An icon change scenario is determined. The timer group to which the increased variation variable timer belongs is determined based on a prefetch result information command or the like from the main control unit 300, and the random number value for the notice target icon display mode lottery is acquired from a random number counter provided in the RAM 408. The

  The range that can be taken by the random number for the notice icon display mode lottery in this example is 0 to 999 (the width of the numerical range is 1000). In each sub-field of “timer group” in the icon display mode lottery table, each numerical value indicates the distribution width of the random numbers for icon display mode lottery. In each sub-column of “timer group”, “0” indicates that the random number value is not distributed.

  The selection probability of each icon change scenario is determined by the distribution width of the random number value for the notice target icon display mode lottery. For example, in the case of timer group 1 where the result of determining whether or not the special figure variation game is correct, the scenario No. 1 is selected. Similarly, in the case of timer group 2 where the result of determining whether or not the special figure variation game is wrong, the scenario number is 96.8%, the timer group 4 is 97.2%, and the timer group 6 is 97.7%. 1 is selected. As described above, in the timer group in which the result of determining whether or not the special figure variation game is successful is out of the scenario No. 1 is selected in most cases.

  In addition, in the timer group where the success / failure determination result of the special figure variable game is hit, the scenario No. In many cases, scenarios other than 1 are selected. For example, in timer group 3, scenario no. 1 has a selection probability of 24.9%. In timer group 5, scenario no. 1 selection probability is 23.9%. In timer group 7, scenario no. The selection probability of 1 is 5.4%.

  As shown in FIG. 16, only in the case of timer groups 6 and 7 where super reach B (swordsman confrontation) can be executed, scenario no. 11 can be selected. In timer group 7 with a high probability that Super Reach B is selected as the effect of the change, scenario No. 1 has a probability of 19.5%. 11 is selected.

  The variation icon has a jackpot reliability determined according to the display mode, and a notice of the special figure variation game being executed is performed according to each display mode. In this example, the reliability (big hit reliability) of the fluctuation icon is about 0.06% for “white”, about 3% for “blue”, and about “green”. The reliability of “red” is about 10%, the reliability of “family crest” is 100%. In the notice object icon display mode lottery table shown in FIG. 16, the timer groups 3, 5, and 7 that are selected at the time of winning are displayed with higher reliability than the timer groups 1, 2, 4, and 6 that are selected at the time of losing. It is easy to select a mode, and it is easy to change to a display mode with high reliability.

  The reliability is the big hit reliability, and indicates what percentage of the big hit is a big hit when the performance of the same mode is executed. For example, the display mode “red” of the fluctuation icon having a reliability of about 30% notifies the player that the probability that the result of the change is a big hit is about 30%, and the result of the change The player is informed that the probability of the loss is about 70%. In this way, the advance notice notifies the reliability of the big hit reliability together with the notice of the big hit reliability. Further, the reliability is not limited to a predetermined numerical value, and the numerical value may have a range, for example, about 5 to 7%. The reliability can be changed by adjusting the distribution width of the random number range of the notice target icon display mode lottery random value. For example, in order to increase the reliability of a specific display mode, the display mode may be easily selected at the time of a big hit, or may not be selected at the time of losing.

  In this way, in this example, if a game ball wins at the special drawing start ports 230 and 232, and the hold related to the win becomes a prefetch notice target, the hold icon corresponding to the prefetch notice hold is displayed at the time of the win. The mode and the display mode of the variation icon corresponding to the variation of the prefetch notice target are determined. FIG. 16 illustrates the notice target icon display mode lottery table used when the number of remaining reservations at the time of winning is three. However, when the number of remaining reservations at the time of winning is between 0 and 2, FIG. The icon change scenario lottery process is executed using a table different from the table shown in FIG. 5 to determine the display mode of the hold icon corresponding to the hold of the prefetch notice target and the variation icon corresponding to the change of the prefetch notice target. ing.

  By the way, the pre-reading notice executed by changing the display form of the hold icon to a display form different from the default is executed only when the special figure variable game related to the notice is a big hit (for example, “ Display mode of “family crest”) and those executed when the special figure change game related to the notice is lost or a big hit (for example, “white”, “blue”, “green”, “red”). In addition, the pre-reading notice is not necessarily executed when the special figure variable game related to the notice is a big hit, but is executed, for example, when a lottery for determining whether or not the pre-reading notice is executed is won. . In addition, “white” set as the default display mode in this example may be a display mode that is selected when the pre-reading notice is not executed.

  Next, the notice non-target icon display mode lottery table used in the icon change scenario lottery process (step S907) will be described with reference to FIG. 17A shows the scenario No. of the notice target icon display mode lottery table shown in FIG. The notice non-target icon display mode lottery table used when 6 is selected is shown. FIG. 17B shows the scenario No. of the notice target icon display mode lottery table shown in FIG. The notice non-target icon display mode lottery table used when 11 is selected is shown. FIG. 17C shows a scenario No. in the notice target icon display mode lottery table shown in FIG. The notice non-target icon display mode lottery table used when 14 is selected is shown.

  In this example, if a game ball wins at the special drawing start ports 230 and 232 and the hold related to the win becomes a prefetch notice target, the display mode of the hold icon corresponding to the prefetch notice non-holding at the time of the win The display mode of the variation icon corresponding to the variation of the non-prefetching notice target is determined. FIG. 17 illustrates the notice non-target icon display mode lottery table used when the number of remaining reservations at the time of winning is three. However, when the number of remaining reservations at the time of winning is 0 to 2, The icon change scenario lottery process is executed using a table different from the table shown in FIG. 17 to determine the display mode of the hold icon corresponding to the pre-reading notice non-target hold and the change icon corresponding to the pre-reading notice non-target change. It is like that.

  As shown in FIGS. 17A to 17C, the notice non-target icon display mode lottery table includes “pattern”, “lottery random number”, “at the time of winning”, “after 1 change”, “after 2 change”. ”,“ After 3 changes ”, and“ At the time of change ”. The item “Pattern” in the left column of the figure indicates a notice non-target icon change pattern when each scenario is selected. As shown in FIG. When 6 and 14 are selected, patterns 1 to 3 are provided, respectively. In addition, scenario no. When 11 is selected, only pattern 1 is provided.

  Scenario No. 6 and 14, a plurality of notice non-target icon change patterns may be provided for one scenario. In addition, scenario no. As shown in FIG. 11, only one notice non-target icon change pattern may be provided for one scenario.

  The item “Lottery random number” on the right side of the “Pattern” diagram indicates the number of random numbers to be assigned to the non-notice icon change pattern lottery value. The random number for the notice non-target icon change pattern lottery is acquired from a random number counter provided in the RAM 408. The range that can be taken by the random number for the notice non-target icon change pattern lottery of this example is 0 to 99 (the width of the numerical range is 100). In each column of “Lottery Random Number”, each numerical value indicates the distribution width of the random number value for the notice non-target icon change pattern lottery.

  The selection probability of each pattern is determined by the distribution width of the random number value for the notice non-target icon display mode lottery. As shown in FIG. At the time of 6 selection, the selection probability of pattern 1 is 34%, the selection probability of pattern 2 is 33%, and the selection probability of pattern 3 is 33%. At the time of 6 selections, the selection probabilities of the patterns are almost the same.

  As shown in FIG. When 11 is selected, since there is only one pattern, the pattern 1 is selected regardless of the value of the random number for icon change pattern lottery.

  As shown in FIG. When 14 selections are made, the selection probability of pattern 1 is 80%, the selection probability of pattern 2 is 10%, and the selection probability of pattern 3 is 10%. At the time of 14 selections, the selection probability of pattern 1 is the highest, and the selection probabilities of patterns 2 and 3 are the same.

  Each item of “On winning”, “After 1 change”, “After 2 change”, “After 3 change” and “At change” on the right side of the “Lottery random number” item is shown in FIG. Corresponds to the item. That is, in FIG. 17, “at the time of winning” indicates a display mode of each icon at the time of winning a notice subject. “After 1 change” indicates the display mode of each icon after 1 change from the winning prize to be notified. “After 2 fluctuations” indicates the display mode of each icon after 2 fluctuations from the winning prize to be notified. “After 3 changes” indicates the display mode of each icon after 3 changes from the winning of the notice subject. “At the time of change” indicates the display mode of each icon displayed during the execution of the special figure change game to be notified.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 17, the items “at the time of winning”, “after 1 change”, “after 2 change”, “after 3 change”, and “the change” correspond to the hold 4 of the hold order 4. “4” indicating the display mode of the hold icon, “3” indicating the display mode of the hold icon corresponding to the hold 3 of the hold order 3, and “2” indicating the display mode of the hold icon corresponding to the hold 2 of the hold order 2 , “1” indicating the display mode of the hold icon corresponding to the hold 1 of the hold order 1, “Fluctuation” indicating the display mode of the fluctuation icon, and “Serif” indicating the line of the fluctuation icon. Yes.

  In this example, the display state of the hold icon corresponding to the hold of the prefetch notice target and the variation icon corresponding to the change of the prefetch notice target are determined using the table shown in FIG. 16, and the prefetch is performed using the table shown in FIG. The display mode of the hold icon corresponding to the non-preliminary hold and the change icon corresponding to the pre-read non-change is determined.

  In the table shown in FIG. 17, “white” indicates that the icon display mode is a white circular image, “blue” indicates that the icon display mode is a blue circular image, and “green”. Indicates that the icon display mode is a green circular image, “red” indicates that the icon display mode is a red circular image, and “family crest” indicates that the icon display mode represents a family crest “Yoshi” indicates that the icon display mode is a character image of Yoshimune, “Hime” indicates that the icon display mode is a princess character image, and “爺” indicates the icon It is shown that the display mode is a character image of a frog.

  Further, in the table shown in FIG. 17, the item “4” for “at the time of winning”, the item “3” for “after 1 change”, the item “2” for “after 2 change”, and “after 3 change”. The item “1” and the item “fluctuation” of “at the time of change” indicate the display mode of the icon to be notified. The display mode of the icons shown in these items matches the display mode of each item shown in FIG.

  Further, in the table shown in FIG. 17, the items “3”, “2”, “1”, “change” for “at the time of winning”, “4”, “2”, “1” for “after 1 change”. , “Change” items, “2” after “4”, “3”, “1”, “change” items, “after 3” “4”, “3”, “2” , “Fluctuation” items, “At Fluctuation” items “4”, “3”, “2”, and “1” indicate display modes of icons that are not subject to pre-reading notice.

  For example, scenario no. In pattern 1 when 6 is selected, the display mode of the hold icon of the hold order 4 is “blue”, the display form of the hold icon of the hold order 3 is “good”, and the hold order 2 when the winning target is the notice. The display mode of the on-hold icon is “good”, the display mode of the on-hold icon 1 is “good”, the display mode of the variation icon is “white”, and there is no “line”. After one change from the winning target for the advance notice, the display mode of the hold icon of the hold rank 4 is “white”, the display mode of the hold icon of the hold rank 3 is “green”, and the hold icon of the hold rank 2 is displayed. The mode is “Ki”, the display mode of the hold icon of the hold order 1 is “Ki”, the display mode of the variation icon is “White”, and “Serif” is “Hot?”. After two fluctuations from the winning target for the advance notice, the display mode of the hold icon of the hold rank 4 is “white”, the display mode of the hold icon of the hold rank 3 is “white”, and the hold icon of the hold rank 2 is displayed. The mode is “green”, the display mode of the hold icon of the hold order 1 is “good”, the display mode of the variation icon is “kichi”, and “serif” is “suspicious!”. After 3 changes from the winning target for the advance notice, the display mode of the hold icon of the hold order 4 is “white”, the display mode of the hold icon of the hold order 3 is “white”, and the hold icon of the hold order 2 is displayed. The mode is “white”, the display mode of the hold icon of the hold order 1 is “green”, the display mode of the variation icon is “good”, and the “serif” is “hot!”. When the notice target changes, the display mode of the hold icon of the hold order 4 is “white”, the display form of the hold icon of the hold order 3 is “white”, and the display mode of the hold icon of the hold order 2 is “ “White”, the display mode of the hold icon of the hold order 1 is “white”, the display mode of the variation icon is “green”, and “line” is not present. In the “Serif” column of the table shown in FIG. 17, “-” indicates that there is no variable icon. In this example, a predetermined line is selected when the variation icon is in a character image display mode.

  In this example, scenario no. 6 and 11 and scenario no. When 14 pattern 1 is selected, the display mode of the hold icon that has been newly increased after winning the award to be notified is set to “white” only. In addition, scenario no. As in the case of 14 patterns 2 and 3 selection, the display mode of the hold icon newly increased after winning the notice target may be set to a display mode other than “white”. As described above, the display mode of the hold icon newly increased after winning the notice subject may be determined in advance by the notice non-target icon display form lottery table when the notice target is won.

  Moreover, you may perform the notification which suggests the content of the reach production performed by the special figure variable game of a notice object. In this example, a scenario No. selectable in the case of timer groups 6 and 7 capable of executing Super Reach B (Swordsman Confrontation). In 11, the line of the variable icon that is not subject to notice is forewarning Super Reach B (Swordsman Confrontation). As shown in FIG. 17 (b), “After 1 change” “Serif” is “Swordsman?”, “After 2 change” “Serif” is “Confrontation!”, “After 3 change” “Serif” is “Easy to win”. These lines may be used as lines of variable icons using commentary characters to be described later.

  Further, in this example, the display mode of the non-notice icon is determined by the icon change scenario lottery process (step S907), but the notice target icon display mode lottery table shown in FIG. 16 is used. When a specific scenario is selected in the lottery, the display mode of the non-notice icon may be determined as a default display mode (for example, “white”), or each of the non-preview target icons may be determined by a predetermined lottery. You may make it determine the display mode of an icon separately.

  Next, the icon display mode of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a table showing a list of icon display modes. The table illustrated in FIG. 18 includes items of “name”, “type”, “display mode”, “prefetching notice hold”, and “prefetching notice non-hold”. “Name” in the left column in the figure indicates the name of each icon. “Type” on the right side of the “Name” diagram indicates the type of icon. In this example, “sphere system” that is a display mode of a circular image and “character system” that is a display mode of a character image are provided as icon types. As shown in FIG. 18, “white”, “blue”, “green”, “red”, and “family crest” belong to the “sphere system”.

  In this example, the display styles belonging to “Character System” are “disappointing” “Yoshimune” that represents disappointing expression, “Mutto” that expresses disappointing expression, and “normal” expression. “Yoshimune (normal)” representing Yoshimune, “Yoshimune” representing Yoshimune with a smiley expression, “Yoshimune (Kai)” representing Yoshimune with a spirited expression, and ordinary expressions “Princess (ordinary)” representing a princess, “Princess (smile)” representing a princess with a smiley expression, “爺 (ordinary)” representing a candy with a normal expression, and a candy with a smiley expression There are provided “Nicori” representing the character, “爺 (commentary)” as the commentary character, and “Echigoya (ordinary)” representing the Echigoya with a normal expression.

  The “display mode” column on the right side of the “type” diagram shows a specific example of the display mode of icons displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In FIG. 18 and each figure to be described later, “blue” is shown as a circular figure with a right-upward hatching, “green” is shown as a circular figure with vertical and horizontal cross-hatching, and “red” is an oblique line This is shown in a circular diagram with cross-hatching.

  A column of “prefetching notice hold” next to the right of the “display mode” diagram indicates whether or not each display form is used as a hold icon of a prefetch notice target. “○” in the column indicates that each display mode is used for the hold icon subject to the prefetch notice, and “X” in the column indicates that each display mode is not used for the hold icon subject to the prefetch notice. Is shown. In this example, the display modes of “Yoshimune (gakari)”, “爺 (commentary)”, and “Echigoya (ordinary)” are not used for the hold icon that is the target of the pre-reading notice, and other display forms are the target of the pre-reading notice. Used for the hold icon.

  As characters appearing in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, Yoshimune and Hime are the main character, and Sakai and Echigoya are the supporting characters. Characters of the leading role are displayed on the game board 200 or displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 during a demonstration performance performed during non-games. It is. Use non-noticeable icon images for liveliness instead of character images that are relatively well-recognized for the player, instead of character images of “Tatsumi (commentary)” and “Echigoya (normal)” supporting characters. In some cases, the icon subject to notice may be conspicuous.

  The “prefetching notice non-target hold” column on the right side of the “prefetching notice target hold” diagram indicates whether or not each display mode is used as a non-target hold icon for the prefetching notice. “○” in the column indicates that each display mode is used for a non-target hold icon for the pre-reading notice, and “X” in the column indicates that each display mode is used for a non-target hold icon for the pre-reading notice. It shows no. In this example, only the display form of “family crest” is not used for the non-target hold icon for the pre-reading notice, and the other display forms are used for the non-target hold icon for the pre-reading notice. This is because the reliability of the display mode of “family crest” is 100%, and it is determined that the success / failure determination result of the special figure variation game related to the “family crest” hold icon will be a big hit. This is because the display mode cannot be used for the hold icon for displaying the hold of the special figure variable game whose jackpot is not fixed.

  Next, a specific example of effects executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described.

(Example 1-1)
FIG. 19 shows an example of effect display in Example 1-1 of the present embodiment in time series. In FIG. 19 and each figure to be described later, the variation of the decorative symbols in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 is represented by a downward bold white arrow. In FIG. 19 and each figure to be described later, the relative arrangement relationship of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 holding lamp 218, the special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure 2 holding lamp 220, and the special figure 2 display device 214 is illustrated. 3 is shown differently. In FIG. 19 and each figure to be described later, a special figure 1 holding lamp 218 and a special figure 2 holding lamp 220 are shown side by side on the lower left side of the decorative symbol display device 208, and below that, the special figure 1 display device 212 and the special figure. Two display devices 214 are shown side by side. In addition, the extinguishing portions of the special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure 2 display device 214, the special figure 1 holding lamp 218, and the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 are shown in white, and the lighting portions are shown in black. In addition, the state in which all segments are represented in white in the special figure 1 display device 212 or the special figure 2 display device 214 indicates that the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 or the special figure 2 is performed. Also, the illustration of the fourth pattern is omitted.

  The lower left area of the effect display area 208 d of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 800. In the variation icon display area 800, one variation icon can be displayed, and whether or not the variation is appropriate can be notified with a predetermined reliability according to the variation icon display mode. The fluctuation icon may be displayed in a display size (for example, a display size larger than the hold icon) different from the hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area 900 described later. This may facilitate identification of the variation icon and the hold icon.

  A horizontally long area below the effect display area 208d and adjacent to the right side of the variable icon display area 800 is a hold icon display area 900. In the hold icon display area 900, one or a plurality of hold icons can be displayed. In the hold icon display area 900, the number of hold of the special figure variable game can be notified by the number of the hold icons, and whether the hold is appropriate or not is notified with a predetermined reliability by the display mode of each hold icon (pre-reading notice) ) Is possible. The hold icon display area 900 of this example can display a maximum of four hold icons, and is roughly divided into four areas: a first area, a second area, a third area, and a fourth area from left to right. ing. The first to fourth areas correspond to the first to fourth holding ranks, respectively. That is, a hold icon corresponding to the earliest (most recently stored) hold 1 can be displayed in the first area, and similarly, the 2nd to 4th hold 2 in the second to fourth areas. The hold icons corresponding to -4 can be displayed. In this example, numbers 1 to 4 are respectively displayed in the first to fourth areas of the hold icon display area 900, and the positions of the first to fourth areas are clearly indicated by the displayed numbers. Clarification of the position of the fourth region may be omitted. Further, in the hold icon display area 900 of this example, only the hold icon of the special figure 1 is displayed, but the hold icon of the special figure 2 may be displayed together.

  FIG. 19A shows a state during the fluctuation period of the special figure 1 variable game. As shown in FIG. 19A, the special figure 1 display device 212 displays the special figure 1 variable display, and the special figure 2 display device 214 displays the special special figure 2 variable game stop symbol. FIG. D is displayed. The special figure 1 holding lamp 218 lights the first to third LEDs from the left to indicate that the number of the active holding balls of the special figure 1 (the number of holdings of the special figure 1) is three, The special figure 2 holding lamp 220 turns off all the LEDs and displays that the number of operation holding balls in the special figure 2 (the number of holdings in the special figure 2) is zero.

  In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In the variation icon display area 800, a variation icon 801 corresponding to the special figure 1 variation game is displayed. The display mode of the fluctuation icon 801 is “white”. As a result, whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is notified with a relatively low reliability (for example, about 0.06%). A hold icon 901 is displayed in the first area of the hold icon display area 900, a hold icon 902 is displayed in the second area, and a hold icon 903 is displayed in the third area. The display modes of the hold icons 901 to 903 are all “white”.

  During the special figure 1 floating game, one game ball wins at the special figure 1 starting port 230, and the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 lights the fourth LED from the left so that the special figure 1 is held 3 times. The increase from 4 to 4 is displayed. Further, the main control unit 300 executes the special figure prefetching process shown in FIG. 8 for the derived special figure 1 start information, and transmits a command including the prefetching result information to the first sub-control unit 400. In this example, since the gaming state is non-electric support, the increased special figure 1 start information is prefetched.

  The first sub-control unit 400 executes an icon display control process shown in FIG. The first sub-control unit 400 receives the command including the prefetch result information from the main control unit 300, and the display mode of the hold icons 901 to 903 is the default “white”, so there is no icon whose display mode is being changed. It is determined that the lottery for determining whether or not to perform the pre-reading notice is won and it is determined that the icon display mode change condition is satisfied, and the icon change scenario lottery process is executed.

  In this example, in the icon change scenario lottery process, the scenario No. 6 pattern 1 (see FIGS. 16 and 17) is selected. For this reason, at the time of winning a prize, the display mode of the hold icons 901 to 903 corresponding to the hold 1 to hold 3 that is not subject to the notice is determined to be “good”, and the display form of the hold icon 904 corresponding to the hold 4 that is subject to the notice is “ “Blue” is determined, and the display mode of the variation icon 801 is determined to be “white”.

  When the above processing is completed, the reserved increase animation shown in FIG. 19B is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In this example, an effect moving image representing an explosion as a hold increase animation is displayed overlapping with the hold icon in a layer (front) above the hold icon display area 900. The hold icon is temporarily hidden by the effect moving image. When the effect moving image is deleted, as shown in FIG. 19C, hold icons 901 to 903 with a display mode of “K” and a hold icon 904 with a display mode of “blue” appear.

  The hold icons 901 to 903 corresponding to the non-target hold of the pre-reading notice have a display mode different from the default display mode “white”. “Blue” of the type “sphere system” is selected as the display mode of the hold icon 904 corresponding to the hold 4 which is the hold of the prefetch notice target. “Yoshimune (ordinary)” of the type “character system” is selected as the display mode of the hold icons 901 to 903 corresponding to the holds 1 to 3 that are not subject to the pre-reading notice. In this example, display modes of different icon types are selected for the hold icon related to the pre-reading notice hold and the hold icon related to the non-prefetch hold.

  After a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the special figure 1 variable game ends. As shown in FIG. 19 (d), the special figure E (displacement) is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212, and the symbol display areas 208a to 208c have symbol combinations “decorations other than the symbol combination for notifying the winning. “2-decoration 3-decoration 0” is stopped and displayed. In the fluctuation icon display area 800, the deletion animation of the fluctuation icon 801 is started. For example, a mode in which the transmittance (transparency) of the variable icon gradually increases is set as the default mode of the erase animation. In this example, the variation icon 801 is deleted in a default mode.

  After a predetermined time has elapsed since the special figure 1 display device 212 stopped and displayed, the next special figure 1 variable game is started. As shown in FIG. 19 (e), the special figure 1 display device 212 starts the fluctuation display of the special figure 1, and the symbol display areas 208a to 208c start the decorative symbol fluctuation display. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 indicates that the hold in the special figure 1 has decreased from 4 to 3 by turning off the fourth LED from the left. The special figure 1 holding lamp 218 notifies that the special figure 1 holding has decreased almost simultaneously with the start of the special figure 1 variable game.

  Further, in the icon display control process executed at the start of the special figure 1 variable game, it is determined that the number of reserved memories in the special figure 1 has decreased, so the hold icon display position changing process is executed. Thus, in the variation icon display area 800 and the hold icon display area 900 of the decorative symbol display device 208, a predetermined animation (in this example, a movement animation between the hold and change icons, a hold icon movement animation, a hold icon change animation). ) Is displayed.

  In the moving animation between the hold and change icons, the hold icon 901 displayed in the first area of the hold icon display area 900 becomes the change icon 802, and the display size is gradually enlarged to the change icon display area 800. Moving. In this example, the hold icon 901 changes to a change icon 802 simultaneously with the start of the special figure 1 change game. Scenario No. of icon change scenario In the pattern 1 of 6, the display mode of the change icon after one change is “good”, so the display mode of the change icon 802 is “good”.

  In the hold icon movement animation, the hold icon 902 displayed in the second area of the hold icon display area 900 gradually moves to the first area, and the hold icon 903 displayed in the third area gradually changes to the second area. Moving to the area, the hold icon 904 displayed in the fourth area gradually moves to the third area.

  When the movement animation between the hold / change icons ends, as shown in FIG. 6 is changed to “green”. Next, as shown in FIG. Based on the pattern 1 of No. 6, Yoshimune's dialogue “Hot?” Of the variation icon 802 is displayed, and the advance notice of the special figure 1 change game related to the prefetch advance notice target (hold 3) is executed. When displaying the line of the variation icon, the expression of the character of the variation icon may be changed. In this example, the display mode of the change icon 802 is changed from “Yoshimune (ordinary)” to “Yoshimune (mu)”.

  After a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the special figure 1 variable game ends. As shown in FIG. 19 (h), the special figure E (displacement) is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212, and the symbol display areas 208a to 208c have symbol combinations “decorations other than the symbol combination for notifying the winning. “6-decoration 1-decoration 8” is stopped and displayed. In the fluctuation icon display area 800, the deletion animation of the fluctuation icon 802 is started. In this example, the variation icon 802 is erased by an erase animation in which the variation icon disappears outside the display area. The erasure animation of the variable icon may be different from the default mode.

  After a predetermined time has elapsed since the special figure 1 display device 212 stopped and displayed, the next special figure 1 variable game is started. As shown in FIG. 19 (i), the special figure 1 display device 212 starts the variable display of the special figure 1, and the symbol display areas 208a to 208c start the decorative symbol variable display. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 displays that the hold in the special figure 1 has decreased from 3 to 2 by turning off the third LED from the left.

  Further, in the icon display control process executed at the start of the special figure 1 variable game, it is determined that the number of reserved memories in the special figure 1 has decreased, so the hold icon display position changing process is executed. Scenario No. of icon change scenario In the pattern 1 of 6, the display mode of the change icon after 2 changes is “good”, and therefore the display mode of the change icon 803 is “good”.

  When the moving animation between the hold / change icons ends, as shown in FIG. 6, the display mode of the hold icon 904 is maintained at “green”.

  During the execution of the special figure 1 variable game, “decoration 8” is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a and 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the reach effect is executed. Even if the reach effect is executed by the change, the notice of the special figure 1 variable game related to the pre-reading notice target (hold 2) by the change icon 802 may be executed. For this reason, as shown in FIG. Based on the pattern 1 of No. 6, the line of Yoshimune of the change icon 802 “Mysterious!” Is displayed, and the advance notice of the special figure 1 change game related to the target of the prefetch notice (hold 2) is executed. Further, when displaying the line of the variation icon, the display mode of the variation icon 802 is changed from “Yoshimune (ordinary)” to “Yoshimune (mu)”.

  After a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the special figure 1 variable game ends. As shown in FIG. 19 (l), the special figure E (displacement) is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212, and the symbol display areas 208a to 208c have symbol combinations “decorations other than the symbol combination for notifying the winning. “8-decoration 9-decoration 8” is stopped and displayed. In the variation icon display area 800, an erase animation of the variation icon 803 is started, and the variation icon 803 is erased with an erase animation in such a manner that the variation icon disappears outside the display area.

  By the way, the conventional game machine changes only the display mode of the hold icon corresponding to the hold of the pre-reading notice target, the pre-reading notice non-target, the display mode of the hold icon that has not changed from the default display form Couldn't give players expectations about the hold. In addition, it was difficult to specify the target for the pre-reading notice, and it was difficult to give the player a sense of expectation. In addition, in a conventional game machine in which a plurality of hold icon default display modes are provided, even if a plurality of hold icons are displayed in different modes, if all are in the default display mode, the reliability of any hold icon is Since it is the same, the player's attention degree with respect to the hold icon was low.

  On the other hand, in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 208 has the first hold icon in the default display mode (for example, “white”) and the second hold icon corresponding to the hold that is not subject to the pre-reading notice ( For example, a hold icon with a display type of “character type”) and a third hold icon (for example, a hold icon with a display type of “ball type” other than “white”) corresponding to the hold for the pre-reading notice target are displayed. The first sub-control unit 400 displays the third hold icon on the decorative symbol display device 208 when the winning is performed in the pre-reading notice execution availability lottery, and the second hold icon is displayed instead of the first hold icon. Executes control to display icons.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, there is a case where the player can be expected to hold the second hold icon whose display mode has been changed from the default display mode, which is not subject to the pre-reading notice. In addition, according to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, it is easy to specify the target of the pre-reading notice, and the player's expectation may be sharpened. Further, according to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the reliability of all the hold icons can be made different, and the player's attention degree to the hold icons can be increased.

(Example 1-2)
20-21 has shown the example of the effect display in Example 1-2 of this Embodiment in time series. FIG. 20A shows a state during the fluctuation period of the special figure 1 variable game. In the special figure 1 display device 212, the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is performed, and in the special figure 2 display device 214, the special figure d which is a stop symbol of the latest special figure 2 fluctuation game is displayed. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 lights the first to third LEDs from the left to indicate that the special figure 1 hold number is 3, and the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 includes all the LEDs. Is turned off to indicate that the number of holds in FIG. 2 is zero.

  In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In the variation icon display area 800, a variation icon 801 corresponding to the special figure 1 variation game is displayed. The display mode of the fluctuation icon 801 is “white”. A hold icon 901 is displayed in the first area of the hold icon display area 900, a hold icon 902 is displayed in the second area, and a hold icon 903 is displayed in the third area. The display modes of the hold icons 901 to 903 are all “white”.

  During the special figure 1 floating game, one game ball wins at the special figure 1 starting port 230, and the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 lights the fourth LED from the left so that the special figure 1 is held 3 times. The increase from 4 to 4 is displayed. Further, the main control unit 300 executes the special figure prefetching process shown in FIG. 8 for the derived special figure 1 start information, and transmits a command including the prefetching result information to the first sub-control unit 400. In this example, since the gaming state is non-electric support, the increased start information of FIG. 1 is prefetched.

  The first sub-control unit 400 executes an icon display control process shown in FIG. The first sub-control unit 400 receives the command including the prefetch result information from the main control unit 300, and the display mode of the hold icons 901 to 903 is the default “white”, so there is no icon whose display mode is being changed. It is determined that the lottery for determining whether or not to perform the pre-reading notice is won and it is determined that the icon display mode change condition is satisfied, and the icon change scenario lottery process is executed.

  In this example, in the icon change scenario lottery process, the scenario No. Eleventh pattern 1 (see FIGS. 16 and 17) is selected. For this reason, at the time of winning a prize, the display mode of the hold icon 901 corresponding to the hold 1 that is not subject to the advance notice is “爺”, the display form of the hold icon 902 corresponding to the hold 2 that is not the subject to the advance notice is “princess”, The display mode of the hold icon 903 corresponding to the hold 3 is determined to be “good”, the display mode of the hold icon 904 corresponding to the hold 4 to be notified is determined to be “blue”, and the display mode of the variation icon 801 is “ “White”.

  When the above processing is completed, the on-hold increasing animation shown in FIG. 20B is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. After the on-hold increasing animation is displayed, as shown in FIG.保留 ”is displayed, the hold icon 902 is displayed in the“ princess ”display mode, the hold icon 903 is displayed in the“ good ”display mode, and the hold icon 904 is displayed in the“ blue ”display mode. The As described above, the scenario No. When 11 is selected, the hold icon corresponding to the hold that is not subject to the pre-reading notice is displayed in the display mode of the type “character system”, and the hold icon corresponding to the hold of the pre-reading notice target is displayed in the display mode of the type “ball system”. The Since the type of the hold icon corresponding to the hold of the pre-reading notice target is different from the type of the hold icon corresponding to the hold of the pre-reading notice target, the player can easily identify the hold of the pre-reading notice target. .

  After a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the special figure 1 variable game ends. As shown in FIG. 20 (d), the special figure E (displacement) is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212, and the symbol display areas 208a to 208c have symbol combinations “decorations other than the symbol combination for notifying the winning. “8-decoration 4-decoration 2” is stopped and displayed. In the variation icon display area 800, the variation icon 801 is deleted in a default mode (for example, a mode in which the transmittance of the variation icon gradually increases).

  Scenario No. of icon change scenario 11, the display mode of the hold icon 904 for the pre-reading notice target (hold 3) is changed from “blue” to “green” when the next special figure variable game is executed (after one change). As shown in FIG. 20D, in order to notify in advance that the display mode of the hold icon 904 is changed to “green” having higher reliability than when the next change starts, the display mode of the hold icon 901 is changed to “ It may be changed from “爺 (ordinary)” to “爺 (smile)”.

  After a predetermined time has elapsed since the special figure 1 display device 212 stopped and displayed, the next special figure 1 variable game is started. As shown in FIG. 20 (e), the special figure 1 display device 212 starts the fluctuation display of the special figure 1, and the symbol display areas 208a to 208c start the decorative symbol fluctuation display. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 indicates that the hold in the special figure 1 has decreased from 4 to 3 by turning off the fourth LED from the left.

  Further, in the icon display control process executed at the start of the special figure 1 variable game, it is determined that the number of reserved memories in the special figure 1 has decreased, so the hold icon display position changing process is executed. Thereby, in the variation icon display area 800 and the hold icon display area 900 of the decorative symbol display device 208, a moving animation between the hold and change icons is displayed. Scenario No. of icon change scenario In Pattern 1 of 11, the display mode of the variation icon after one variation is “爺”, so the display mode of the variation icon 802 is “爺”.

  When the movement animation between the hold / change icons ends, as shown in FIG. 11 is changed to “green”. Further, as shown in FIG. Based on the pattern 1 of 11, the word “Swordsman?” Of the variation icon 802 is displayed, and the advance notice of the special figure 1 change game related to the prefetch advance notice target (hold 3) is executed.

  After a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the special figure 1 variable game ends. As shown in FIG. 20 (h), the special figure E (displacement) is stopped on the special figure 1 display device 212, and the symbol combination “decoration” other than the symbol combination for notifying the winning is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. “6-decoration 1-decoration 8” is stopped and displayed. In the fluctuation icon display area 800, the deletion animation of the fluctuation icon 802 is started. In this example, the variation icon 802 is erased by an erase animation in which the variation icon disappears outside the display area.

  After a predetermined time has elapsed since the special figure 1 display device 212 stopped and displayed, the next special figure 1 variable game is started. As shown in FIG. 20 (i), the special figure 1 display device 212 starts the variable display of the special figure 1, and the symbol display areas 208a to 208c start the decorative symbol variable display. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 displays that the hold in the special figure 1 has decreased from 3 to 2 by turning off the third LED from the left.

  Further, in the icon display control process executed at the start of the special figure 1 variable game, it is determined that the number of reserved memories in the special figure 1 has decreased, so the hold icon display position changing process is executed. Thereby, in the variation icon display area 800 and the hold icon display area 900 of the decorative symbol display device 208, a moving animation between the hold and change icons is displayed. Scenario No. of icon change scenario In the pattern 1 of 11, the display mode of the change icon after 2 changes is “Princess”, so the display mode of the change icon 803 is “Princess”.

  When the moving animation between the hold and change icons is finished, as shown in FIG. 11, the display mode of the hold icon 904 is changed to “red”, the princess line of the change icon 803 “Confrontation!” Is displayed, and the special figure 1 relating to the target of the pre-reading notice (hold 2) A floating game notice is executed. The image indicating the princess dialogue “confrontation!” Of the variation icon 803 can partially hide the variation display of the decorative symbol in the middle symbol display area 208b.

  In this example, the reach effect is executed in the special figure 1 variable game related to the pre-reading notice target (hold 2) (details will be described later). Even in the case where the reach effect is not executed in the special figure variable game related to the pre-reading notice hold, the display mode of the hold icon 904 is changed to “green” with higher reliability, or the pre-read notice non-holding is not used. The presentation may be executed by changing the display mode of the corresponding hold icons 902 and 903 to “Hime” or “Yoshimune”.

  After a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the special figure 1 variable game ends. As shown in FIG. 20 (k), the special figure E (displacement) is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212, and the symbol combination “decoration” other than the symbol combination for notifying the winning is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. “3-decoration 1-decoration 5” is stopped and displayed. In the variation icon display area 800, an erase animation of the variation icon 803 is started, and the variation icon 803 is erased with an erase animation in such a manner that the variation icon disappears outside the display area. When the erase animation is displayed, the change icon 803 cannot hide the stop symbol of the decorative symbol, and a part thereof is hidden by the stop symbol of the decorative symbol.

  During the stop display of the special figure 1, one game ball wins the special figure 1 starting port 230, and the holding of the special figure 1 increases from 2 to 3. The main control unit 300 executes the special figure prefetch process shown in FIG. 8 for the derived special figure 1 start information, and transmits a command including the prefetch result information to the first sub control unit 400. In this example, since the gaming state is non-electric support, the increased start information of FIG. 1 is prefetched. Further, the first sub control unit 400 executes the icon display control process shown in FIG. The first sub-control unit 400 receives the command including the prefetch result information from the main control unit 300, and since the display mode of the hold icon 904 is “blue”, the first sub-control unit 400 determines that there is an icon whose display mode is being changed and has increased. The display mode of the hold icon 905 corresponding to the hold is set to the default display mode “white”.

  After a predetermined time has elapsed since the special figure 1 display device 212 stopped and displayed, the next special figure 1 variable game is started. As shown in FIG. 20 (l), the special figure 1 display device 212 starts the fluctuation display of the special figure 1, and the symbol display areas 208a to 208c start the decorative symbol fluctuation display. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 displays that the hold in the special figure 1 has decreased from 3 to 2 by turning off the third LED from the left.

  Further, in the icon display control process executed at the start of the special figure 1 variable game, it is determined that the number of reserved memories in the special figure 1 has decreased, so the hold icon display position changing process is executed. Thereby, in the variation icon display area 800 and the hold icon display area 900 of the decorative symbol display device 208, a moving animation between the hold and change icons is displayed. Scenario No. of icon change scenario In the pattern 1 of 11, the display mode of the change icon after 3 changes is “good”, so the display mode of the change icon 804 is “good”.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 20 (l), the hold icon 905 corresponding to the hold 2 after the hold 1 to be prefetched and indicated by the hold icon 904 is displayed in the default display mode “white”. Thereby, it may be easy for the player to recognize the boundary of the reservation order to be noted.

  When the movement animation between the hold / change icons ends, as shown in FIG. 11, the display mode of the hold icon 904 is maintained in “red”, the Yoshimune line “Rakukatsuja” of the change icon 804 is displayed, and the special chart 1 relating to the target of the pre-reading notice (hold 1) A floating game notice is executed. In order to suggest that the swordsman showdown is an easy victory, the display mode of the variation icon 804 is “disappointing”. As described above, in this embodiment, the non-notice change icon notifies that the swordsman confrontation (super reach B) is executed in the notice change when the change is executed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 21A, the change icon 804 is displayed in a layer (front) above the hold icon 904, and the hold icon 904 corresponding to the hold of the pre-reading notice target in the line portion of the change icon 804. You may hide part of.

  After a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the special figure 1 variable game ends. As shown in FIG. 21 (b), the special figure E (displacement) is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212, and the symbol display areas 208a to 208c have symbol combinations “decorations other than the symbol combinations for notifying the hits”. “7-decoration 1-decoration 1” is stopped and displayed. In the variation icon display area 800, an erase animation of the variation icon 803 is started, and the variation icon 804 is erased with an erase animation in a manner that the variation icon disappears outside the display area.

  After a predetermined time has elapsed since the special figure 1 display device 212 stopped and displayed, the next special figure 1 variable game is started. As shown in FIG. 21C, the special figure 1 display device 212 starts the fluctuation display of the special figure 1, and the symbol display areas 208a to 208c start the decorative symbol fluctuation display. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 displays that the hold in the special figure 1 has decreased from 2 to 1 by turning off the second LED from the left.

  Further, in the icon display control process executed at the start of the special figure 1 variable game, it is determined that the number of reserved memories in the special figure 1 has decreased, so the hold icon display position changing process is executed. Thereby, in the variation icon display area 800 and the hold icon display area 900 of the decorative symbol display device 208, a moving animation between the hold and change icons is displayed. Scenario No. of icon change scenario 11, the display mode of the change icon at the time of change is “red”, so the display mode of the change icon 805 is “red”.

  During the execution of the special figure 1 variable game, “decoration 7” is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a and 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIG. In this variation, a variation timer (variation time) belonging to the timer group 7 is selected, and super reach B (swordsman confrontation) is executed in the reach effect.

  During the reach production, “decoration 7” is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a and 208b in the upper left of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner in the symbol display region 208b, and the variation of the decorative symbol becomes reach. Is displayed.

  At the start of Super Reach B (Swordsman Confrontation), as shown in FIG. 21 (e), a moving image representing Yoshimune challenging the swordsman is displayed in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208, and then FIG. As shown in f), the moving image of the swordsman who greets Yoshimune and the character image “Swordsman sees !!” are displayed in the effect display area 208d, and then, as shown in FIG. 21 (g), Yoshimune and swordsman confront each other. The moving image to be displayed is displayed in the effect display area 208d, and then, as shown in FIG. 21 (h), the moving image showing the state after Yoshimune and the swordsman slashed is displayed in the effect display area 208d. As shown in (i), a moving image of a scene in which the expression of the swordsman is distorted is displayed in the effect display area 208d. Thereby, the player can be expected to win a big hit in the special figure 1 variable game, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 21 (j), the fact that Yoshimune won in the swordsman confrontation is displayed in the effect display area 208d, and the reach effect ends. When the reach effect ends, as shown in FIG. 21 (k), the special figure A (16R special big hit) is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212, and the symbol display areas 208a to 208c are notified of the big hit. The symbol combination “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” is stopped and displayed.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, when the first sub-control unit 400 displays two or more default display modes (for example, “white”) on the decorative symbol display device 208, the first hold icon is displayed. When the icon change condition is satisfied, a second hold icon (for example, a hold icon with a display type of “爺” of type “character system”) is used instead of at least one of the first hold icons. A control to display, and a control to display a fourth hold icon (for example, a hold icon in a display mode of “princess” of type “character system”) instead of at least one of the first hold icons. Do. The mode of the fourth hold icon and the mode of the second hold icon are different modes, but are similar modes of the same type.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the hold icon corresponding to the hold that is the target of the pre-reading notice becomes clearer, and thus the player's expectation may be maintained until the start of the change of the hold. .

  Moreover, the pachinko machine 100 may make the mode of the second hold icon the same as the mode of the first hold icon. Since the first and second hold icons are both hold icons corresponding to pre-read non-target hold, a default display mode (for example, “white”) may be used.

(Example 1-3)
FIG. 22 shows an example of effect display in Example 1-3 of the present embodiment in time series. FIG. 22A shows a state during the fluctuation period of the special figure 1 variable game. The special figure 1 holding lamp 218 lights up the first to fourth LEDs from the left to indicate that the number of holdings in the special figure 1 is 4, and the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 includes all the LEDs. Is turned off to indicate that the number of holds in FIG. 2 is zero.

  In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In the variation icon display area 800, a variation icon 801 corresponding to the special figure 1 variation game is displayed. The display mode of the fluctuation icon 801 is “white”. A hold icon 901 is displayed in the first area of the hold icon display area 900, a hold icon 902 is displayed in the second area, a hold icon 903 is displayed in the third area, and a hold icon 904 is displayed in the fourth area. The display modes of the hold icons 901 to 904 are all “white”.

  An icon change condition is established during the special figure 1 variable game. As described above, the icon change condition may be satisfied other than at the start of the change. Based on the establishment of the icon change condition, the first sub-control unit 400 performs a process of changing the icon display mode. When the icon display mode of this example is changed, as shown in FIG. 22B, an effect moving image representing an explosion is displayed overlapping with the hold icon in a layer (front) above the hold icon display area 900. . The hold icon is temporarily hidden by the effect moving image. When the effect moving image is deleted, as shown in FIG. 22C, the hold icons 901, 903, and 904 in the display mode of “Yoshimune (ordinary)” and the hold icon in the display mode of “Yoshimune (Kai)” 902 appears. In this example, the hold 2 indicated by the hold icon 902 is a prefetch notice target, and the hold 1, 3, 4 shown by the hold icons 901, 903, and 904 is not a prefetch notice target. The hold icon 902 corresponding to the hold 2 subject to the pre-reading notice and the hold icons 901, 903, and 904 for the hold 1, 3, and 4 that are not subject to the pre-reading notice differ in the display mode, but “ Yoshimune ". The player can specify which hold is subject to a prefetch notice by the expression of Yoshimune on the hold icon.

  In addition, the first sub-control unit 400 causes the icon change animation to be displayed on the decorative symbol table device 208 and at the same time, causes the speaker 120 to output a predetermined sound effect (for example, a sound effect of “docan”).

  Further, as shown in FIG. 22C, a hold icon 902 corresponding to the hold 2 subject to the pre-reading notice and the hold icons 901 and 903 adjacent to the hold icon 902 are partially overlapped to display the hold icon 902. You may display so that it may become the foremost layer. Further, the change icon 801 may be displayed in a display mode of “Yoshimune (ordinary)” in accordance with the display mode of the hold icon.

  After a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the special figure 1 variable game ends. As shown in FIG. 22 (d), the special figure E (displacement) is stopped on the special figure 1 display device 212, and the symbol combination “decoration” other than the symbol combination for notifying the winning is displayed in the symbol display areas 208 a to 208 c. “8-decoration 3-decoration 5” is stopped and displayed. In the variation icon display area 800, the variation icon 801 is erased by an erasing animation in which the variation icon disappears outside the display area.

  After a predetermined time has elapsed since the special figure 1 display device 212 stopped and displayed, the next special figure 1 variable game is started. As shown in FIG. 22 (e), the special figure 1 display device 212 starts the variable display of the special figure 1, and the decorative display variable display is started in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 indicates that the hold in the special figure 1 has decreased from 4 to 3 by turning off the fourth LED from the left.

  Further, in the icon display control process executed at the start of the special figure 1 variable game, it is determined that the number of reserved memories in the special figure 1 has decreased, so the hold icon display position changing process is executed. When the movement animation between the hold / change icons ends, the change icon 802 and the hold icons 902 to 904 are respectively displayed at predetermined positions as shown in FIG.

  During the special figure 1 floating game, one game ball wins at the special figure 1 starting port 230, and the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 lights the fourth LED from the left so that the special figure 1 is held 3 times. The increase from 4 to 4 is displayed. As shown in FIG. 22G, the hold icon 905 corresponding to the increased hold is displayed as “Yoshimune (ordinary)”.

  After a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the special figure 1 variable game ends. As shown in FIG. 22 (h), the special figure E display device 212 is stopped and the special figure E (displacement) is stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. “2-decoration 2-decoration 1” is stopped and displayed. In the variation icon display area 800, the variation icon 802 is erased by an erasing animation in which the variation icon disappears outside the display area.

  After a predetermined time has elapsed since the special figure 1 display device 212 stopped and displayed, the next special figure 1 variable game is started. As shown in FIG. 22 (i), the special figure 1 display device 212 starts the variable display of the special figure 1, and the decorative display variable display starts in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 indicates that the hold in the special figure 1 has decreased from 4 to 3 by turning off the fourth LED from the left.

  Further, in the icon display control process executed at the start of the special figure 1 variable game, it is determined that the number of reserved memories in the special figure 1 has decreased, so the hold icon display position changing process is executed. Thereby, in the variation icon display area 800 and the hold icon display area 900 of the decorative symbol display device 208, a moving animation between the hold and change icons is displayed. After the movement animation between the hold / change icons is finished, the change icon 803 and the hold icons 903 to 905 are displayed at predetermined positions. The display mode of the fluctuation icon 803 is “Yoshimune (Kai)” as with the hold icon 902.

  In this change, the reach effect of the swordsman confrontation (super reach B) is executed. A character image “Ixo” is displayed on the variation icon 803 at the start of the execution of the variation, suggesting that a swordsman confrontation is started, and the display mode of the hold icons 902 to 905 is a mode of supporting Yoshimune of the variation icon 803 At the same time, the character images “Ganbare”, “Ikeike”, and “Izo” are displayed. In this way, the display mode of the hold icon that is not subject to the pre-reading notice may be changed in accordance with the movement of the fluctuation icon of the notice target fluctuation. In this case, the hold icons 903 to 905 corresponding to the hold that is not subject to the pre-reading notice do not notify the jackpot reliability for each hold but suggest a reach effect of the change.

  Super reach B (swordsman confrontation) is started after a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the special figure variable game. In this example, as shown in FIG. 22 (j), it is displayed in the effect display area 208d that Yoshimune was defeated in the swordsman confrontation, the reach effect is finished, and the symbol display areas 208a to 208c are notified of the hit. A symbol combination “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7” other than the symbol combination is displayed.

  When the reach effect is completed, as shown in FIG. 22 (k), the special figure E (displacement) is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212, and the symbol combination for notifying the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. The symbol combination “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7” other than is stopped and displayed. In addition, since the result of the change, which is the subject of the advance notice, is out of place, the display mode of the change icon 802 and the hold icons 902 to 905 is changed to “disappointing”. If a big hit is made due to a change that was the subject of advance notice, even if the display mode of the change icon and the hold icon is changed to a facial expression in which a character of type “Character” such as “Yoshimune” smiles Good.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 22 (l), the hold icons 903 to 905 are changed to the default display mode ("white"). Further, the hold icons 903 to 905 may be returned to the original display mode (in this example, “Yoshimune (ordinary)”).

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment includes a hold icon (hold icon 901) corresponding to the hold before the pre-reading notice target hold, and a hold icon (hold icons 903, 904, 905) corresponding to the hold after the pre-read notice target hold. ) Is changed from the default display mode.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, it is possible to prevent a stop by giving the player a sense of expectation for the hold after the pre-reading notice hold, and to promote the player to launch a game ball. There is.

(Example 1-4)
FIG. 23 shows an example of effect display in Example 1-4 of the present embodiment in time series. FIG. 23A shows a state during the fluctuation period of the special figure 1 variable game. In the special figure 1 display device 212, the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is performed, and in the special figure 2 display device 214, the special figure d which is a stop symbol of the latest special figure 2 fluctuation game is displayed. The special figure 1 holding lamp 218 lights up the first to second LEDs from the left to indicate that the number of holdings in the special figure 1 is two. The special figure 2 holding lamp 220 includes all the LEDs. Is turned off to indicate that the number of holds in FIG. 2 is zero.

  In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In the variation icon display area 800, a variation icon 801 corresponding to the special figure 1 variation game is displayed. The display mode of the fluctuation icon 801 is “Yoshimune (ordinary)”. A hold icon 901 is displayed in the first area of the hold icon display area 900, and a hold icon 902 is displayed in the second area. The display mode of the hold icon 901 is “Yoshimune (Kai)”, and the display mode of the hold icon 902 is “Yoshimune (ordinary)”.

  In this example, the hold icon corresponding to the hold of the prefetch notice target is displayed in the display mode of “Yoshimune (Kai)”. In this example, the hold 1 indicated by the hold icon 901 is a prefetch notice target.

  During the special figure 1 variable game, one game ball is won at the special figure 1 starting port 230, and the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 lights the third LED from the left, so that the special figure 1 is held 2 times. The increase from 3 to 3 is displayed. Further, the main control unit 300 executes the special figure prefetching process shown in FIG. 8 for the derived special figure 1 start information, and transmits a command including the prefetching result information to the first sub-control unit 400. In this example, since the gaming state is non-electric support, the increased start information of FIG. 1 is prefetched.

  The first sub-control unit 400 executes icon display control processing. The first sub-control unit 400 receives the command including the prefetch result information from the main control unit 300, and the display mode of the hold icon 901 is “Yoshimune (Kai)”. It is determined that there is an inside icon, and the display mode of the hold icon corresponding to the increased hold is set to the display mode of “Yoshimune (ordinary)”.

  When the above processing is completed, as shown in FIG. 23B, a hold icon 903 corresponding to the increased hold is displayed in a display mode of “Yoshimune (ordinary)”.

  After a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the special figure 1 variable game ends. As shown in FIG. 23 (c), the special figure E (displacement) is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212, and the symbol display areas 208a to 208c have symbol combinations “decorations other than the symbol combination for notifying the winning. “8-decoration 3-decoration 5” is stopped and displayed. In the variation icon display area 800, the variation icon 801 is erased by an erasing animation in which the variation icon disappears outside the display area.

  After a predetermined time has elapsed since the special figure 1 display device 212 stopped and displayed, the next special figure 1 variable game is started. As shown in FIG. 23D, the special figure 1 display device 212 starts the variable display of the special figure 1, and the symbol display areas 208a to 208c start the decorative symbol variable display. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 displays that the hold in the special figure 1 has decreased from 3 to 2 by turning off the third LED from the left.

  The change is the special figure 1 change game related to the hold for the pre-reading notice target. As shown in FIG. 23D, at the start of the change of the prefetching notice target, the display mode of the hold icons 902 and 903 corresponding to the prefetch non-hold hold is changed to “Yoshimune (Kai)” same as the change icon 802. Also good.

  In the special figure 1 variable game, Super Reach B (Swordsman Showdown) is executed. In this example, as shown in FIG. 23 (e), the fact that Yoshimune was defeated in the swordsman confrontation is displayed in the effect display area 208d, the reach effect is terminated, and the symbol display areas 208a to 208c are notified of the hit. A symbol combination “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7” other than the symbol combination is displayed.

  When the reach effect is completed, as shown in FIG. 23 (f), the special figure E (displacement) is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212, and the symbol combinations for notifying the symbol display areas 208a to 208c are displayed. The symbol combination “decoration 7-decoration 6-decoration 7” other than is stopped and displayed. Further, since the result of the change is out of place, the display mode of the change icon 802 and the hold icons 902 and 903 is changed to “disappointing”.

  FIGS. 23 (g) and 23 (h) show the time when the variable icon deletion animation is displayed. At the end of the target change of the prefetching notice, as shown in FIG. 23G, the display mode of the hold icon 903 is changed to “Yoshimune (Kai)” based on the prefetching notice result information, and the hold 2 is set as the prefetching notice object. A pre-reading notice may be executed. Further, at the end of the target change of the prefetch notice, as shown in FIG. 23 (h), the hold icons 902 and 903 are changed to the default display mode ("white"), and the hold increased during execution of the prefetch notice. You may regulate the pre-reading notice for. Since the player may have a bad impression when the target variation of the pre-reading notice is continued, the change after the deviation of the target change of the pre-reading notice may be excluded from the pre-reading notice.

  Further, the display mode of the hold icon corresponding to the hold increased during execution of the prefetch notice may be changed according to the display mode of the hold icon corresponding to the hold of the prefetch notice mode. Further, during the execution of the prefetch notice that changes the hold icon to a predetermined display mode, the hold icon corresponding to the next hold of the prefetch notice target is changed to the default display mode, and the next hold of the hold is handled. The hold icon may be changed to the display mode of the prefetch notice. At this time, the hold icon corresponding to the hold of the first prefetch notice target may be changed to a display mode with low reliability.

(Example 1-5)
FIG. 24 shows an example of effect display in Example 1-5 of the present embodiment in time series. FIG. 24A shows a state during the fluctuation period of the special figure 1 variable game. In the special figure 1 display device 212, the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is performed, and in the special figure 2 display device 214, the special figure d which is a stop symbol of the latest special figure 2 fluctuation game is displayed. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 lights the first to third LEDs from the left to indicate that the special figure 1 hold number is 3, and the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 includes all the LEDs. Is turned off to indicate that the number of holds in FIG. 2 is zero.

  In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In the variation icon display area 800, a variation icon 801 corresponding to the special figure 1 variation game is displayed. The display mode of the fluctuation icon 801 is “white”. A hold icon 901 is displayed in the first area of the hold icon display area 900, a hold icon 902 is displayed in the second area, and a hold icon 903 is displayed in the third area. The display modes of the hold icons 901 to 903 are all “white”.

  When the icon change condition is satisfied after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the special figure 1 variable game, a change animation of the hold icon is displayed for the hold of the prefetch notice target. In this example, as shown in FIG. 24B, the effect moving image representing the explosion is displayed overlapping with the hold icon 902 in a layer (front) above the hold icon 902. The hold icon 902 is temporarily hidden by the effect moving image. When the effect moving image is deleted, as shown in FIG. 24C, a hold icon 902 whose display mode is changed from “white” to “Yoshimune (Kai)” appears. In this example, the hold 2 displayed with the hold icon 902 in the display mode of “Yoshimune (Kai)” is the prefetching notice target.

  After the display mode of the hold icon 902 corresponding to the hold 2 subject to the pre-reading notice is changed, as shown in FIG. 24D, the change animation of the hold icon is displayed for the hold not subject to the pre-reading notice, and an effect representing explosion A moving image is displayed overlapping with the hold icons 901 and 903 in a layer (front) above the hold icons 901 and 903. The hold icons 901 and 903 are temporarily hidden by the effect moving image. When the effect moving image is deleted, as shown in FIG. 24E, a hold icon 902 in which the display mode is changed from “white” to “Yoshimune (normal)” appears. In this example, the hold 1 and 3 displayed with the hold icons 901 and 903 in the display mode of “Yoshimune (ordinary)” are not subject to the pre-reading notice.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 24E, the display mode of the change icon 801 used for the change notice may not be changed, and the default display mode “white” may be left as it is.

  As described above, in order to make the hold of the pre-reading notice target stand out, the display mode of the hold icon corresponding to the hold of the pre-reading notice target is changed, and then the display mode of the hold icon corresponding to the pre-reading notice non-holding is changed. May be. The display mode change timing of the hold icon corresponding to the hold of the pre-reading notice target may be after the display mode of the hold icon corresponding to the hold of the pre-reading notice target is changed. For example, when the predetermined time has elapsed since the change of the display mode of the hold icon corresponding to the hold of the prefetch notice target, or when the chance button 136 is pressed after the change of the display mode of the hold icon corresponding to the hold of the prefetch notice target, the prefetch notice What is necessary is just to make it the display mode change timing of the hold icon corresponding to non-hold hold.

  In addition, the display mode of the hold icon corresponding to the hold of the pre-reading notice non-target that is later than the hold of the pre-reading notice target is changed, and the holding of the pre-reading notice non-target that has a hold order earlier than the hold of the pre-reading notice target is changed. It is not necessary to change the display mode of the hold icon corresponding to. In this example, the display mode of the hold icon 901 may be changed without changing the display mode of the hold icon 901.

  Further, even after the display mode of the hold icon is changed, the display mode of the fluctuation icon used as the notice of the change may not be changed. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 24E, the display mode of the variation icon 801 is maintained to be “white”.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the timing of changing the display mode of the hold icon corresponding to the hold of the pre-reading notice target is changed from the timing of changing the display mode of the hold icon corresponding to the hold of the pre-reading notice non-target. Yes. According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, there is a case where the pre-reading notice target can be more conspicuous.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 24F to 24I, after changing the display mode of the hold icon 902 corresponding to the hold of the prefetch notice target, the hold icon 901 corresponding to the hold of the prefetch notice non-target. , Before changing the display mode of 903, the effect when one game ball wins the special figure 1 starting port 230 and the holding of the special figure 1 increases will be described. FIG. 24F shows a state immediately after the display mode of the hold icon 902 corresponding to the hold of the pre-reading notice target is changed.

  As shown in FIG. 24 (g), after winning the special figure 1 starting port 230, first, the display mode of the hold icon corresponding to the hold related to the win is changed. A hold icon change animation is displayed for the hold related to the winning, and thereafter, a hold icon 904 changed to “Yoshimune (ordinary)” appears as shown in FIG.

  After changing the display mode of the hold icon corresponding to the hold related to the winning, a change animation of the hold icon is displayed as shown in FIG. 24 (h), and then “Yoshimune” as shown in FIG. 24 (i). On-hold icons 901 and 903 that have changed to “ordinary” appear.

  In this way, when changing the display mode of the hold icon corresponding to the hold that is not subject to the pre-reading notice, the display mode of the hold icon corresponding to the hold related to the new winning is changed first, and the existing hold is supported. By changing the display mode of the hold icon to be performed thereafter, it may be possible to promote the launch of the game ball by the player.

(Example 1-6)
FIG. 25 shows an example of effect display in Example 1-6 of the present embodiment in time series. 25 (a) to 25 (f), an explanation will be given by taking as an example the pachinko machine 100 of the special figure 2 priority variation in which the special figure 2 hold is digested in preference to the special figure 1 hold. FIG. 25A shows a state during the fluctuation period of the special figure 2 variable game. As shown in FIG. 25 (a), the special figure 2 display device 214 displays the special figure 2 variable display, and the special figure 1 display device 212 has the special special figure 1 variable game stop symbol. Figure E is displayed. The special figure 1 holding lamp 218 lights the first to third LEDs from the left to indicate that the number of holdings in the special figure 1 is 3, and the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 is 1 from the left. The third LED is turned on to indicate that the number of holdings in FIG. 2 is three.

  Of the effect display area 208 d of the decorative symbol display device 208, the area in the lower center part is a variable icon display area 800. A horizontally long area below the effect display area 208d and adjacent to the left side of the variable icon display area 800 is a special figure 1 hold icon display area 910. A horizontally long area below the effect display area 208d and adjacent to the right side of the variable icon display area 800 is a special figure 2 reserved icon display area 920. In the special figure 1 and special figure 2 hold icon display areas 910 and 920, one or a plurality of hold icons can be displayed. In special figure 1 and special figure 2 hold icon display areas 910 and 920, the number of hold of each special figure variable game can be notified by the number of hold icons, and whether or not the hold is made depending on the display mode of each hold icon. Can be notified (pre-reading notice) with a predetermined reliability. The special figure 1 and special figure 2 hold icon display areas 910 and 920 of this example can each display a maximum of four hold icons. The special figure 1 hold icon display area 910 is roughly divided into four areas of a first area, a second area, a third area, and a fourth area from right to left. The special figure 2 hold icon display area 920 is roughly divided into four areas of a first area, a second area, a third area, and a fourth area from left to right. The first to fourth areas correspond to the first to fourth holding ranks of the special drawings.

  In the variation icon display area 800, a variation icon 801 corresponding to the special figure 2 variation game is displayed. In the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area 910, a hold icon 911 is displayed, a hold icon 912 is displayed in the second area, and a hold icon 913 is displayed in the third area. The special icon 2 hold icon display area 920 displays a hold icon 921 in the first area, a hold icon 922 in the second area, and a hold icon 923 in the third area.

  In this example, a white circular image is set as the default display mode of the fluctuation icon and the hold icon of the special figure 1, and a white square image is set as the default display mode of the fluctuation icon and the hold icon of the special figure 2. Yes.

  An icon change condition is established during the special figure 2 variable game. Based on the establishment of the icon change condition, the first sub-control unit 400 performs a process of changing the icon display mode. When the icon display mode of this example is changed, as shown in FIG. 25B, the effect moving image representing the explosion overlaps with the hold icon in a layer (front) above the special figure 2 hold icon display area 920. Is displayed. The hold icon is temporarily hidden by the effect moving image. When the effect moving image is deleted, as shown in FIG. 25 (c), the hold icons 921 and 923 in the display mode of “Echigoya (ordinary)” and the hold icon 922 in the blue square mode appear.

  In this example, the gaming state is in electric support. In the electric support, in the pachinko machine 100 with special figure 2 priority fluctuation, the display mode of the hold icon of the special figure 2 that is preferentially digested is changed, and the display mode of the hold icon of the special figure 1 is not changed. Good. Further, when one of the reservations in FIG. 2 is to be prefetched, the display mode of the hold icon in FIG. 2 may be changed and the display mode of the hold icon in FIG. 1 may not be changed.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 25 (d), if the special drawing subject to the pre-reading notice is different, the display mode of the holding icon in FIG. 1 and the holding icon in FIG. A pre-reading notice may be made at the same time. For example, for the hold icon of FIG. 1, the display mode of the hold icon 911 is changed to “爺 (normal)”, the display mode of the hold icon 912 is changed to “princess (normal)”, and the display mode of the hold icon 913 is changed to “green”. Has been.

  In the example shown in FIG. 25 (d), the display mode of the hold icon 913 corresponding to the pre-reading notice hold shown in FIG. 1 is “green” in which the display color is changed from the default display mode. The display mode of the hold icon 922 corresponding to the hold to be notified is a blue square image in which the display color is changed from the default display mode. As described above, the display mode of the hold icon 913 corresponding to the pre-reading notice target hold uses a mode in which the display color is changed from the default display mode.

  Moreover, the display mode of the hold icon corresponding to the hold for which the pre-reading notice is not applicable may be different between the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. For example, “Yoshimune”, “Princess”, and “爺” of the type “Character” are used as the display mode of the hold icon corresponding to the hold that is not subject to the pre-reading notice in FIG. As the display mode of the hold icon corresponding to the hold, “Echigoya” and “Evil Agent” (character image representing the Evil Agent, not shown in FIG. 18) of the type “Character” are used.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 25 (e) to 25 (f), an example of effect display in the case of non-electric support in the special figure 2 priority variation pachinko machine 100 will be described. FIG. 25 (e) shows a state during the variable period of the special figure 1 variable game. As shown in FIG. 25 (e), the special figure 1 display unit 212 displays the special figure 1 variable display, and the special figure 2 display unit 214 displays the special special figure 2 variable game stop symbol. FIG. D is displayed. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 lights the first to third LEDs from the left to indicate that the special figure 1 hold number is 3, and the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 includes all the LEDs. Is turned off to indicate that the number of holds in FIG. 2 is zero.

  In the variation icon display area 800, a variation icon 801 corresponding to the special figure 1 variation game is displayed. The display mode of the fluctuation icon 801 is “爺 (normal)”. In the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area 910, a hold icon 911 is displayed, a hold icon 912 is displayed in the second area, and a hold icon 913 is displayed in the third area. The display mode of the hold icon 911 is “Princess (Normal)”, the display mode of the hold icon 912 is “Yoshimune (Normal)”, and the display mode of the hold icon 913 is “Green”.

  During the special figure 1 variable game, one game ball wins the special figure 1 starting port 230, and as shown in FIG. 25 (f), the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 lights the fourth LED from the left. As a result, it is displayed that the suspension of the special figure 1 has increased from 3 to 4. Further, the main control unit 300 executes the special figure prefetching process shown in FIG. 8 for the derived special figure 1 start information, and transmits a command including the prefetching result information to the first sub-control unit 400. In this example, since the gaming state is non-electric support, the increased start information of FIG. 1 is prefetched.

  Also, during the special figure 1 variable game, one game ball wins the special figure 2 starting port 232, and the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 lights the first LED from the left to hold the special figure 2 on hold. Is increased from 0 to 1.

  In this example, when the special figure 1 hold increases during non-electric support, the increased start information of the special figure 1 is prefetched, and the display mode of the hold icon corresponding to the hold increased based on the prefetch result information is changed. Is done. For example, as shown in FIG. 25 (f), the hold icon 914 corresponding to the increased hold is displayed with “爺 (normal)” different from the default display mode.

  Further, when the number of suspensions in FIG. 2 increases during non-electric support, a suspension icon corresponding to the increased suspension is displayed in a default display mode. As shown in FIG. 25 (f), the hold icon 921 corresponding to the increased hold is displayed in a default display mode (white square image).

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment displays a special figure 1 hold icon display area 910 for displaying the number of hold of the special figure 1 and a special figure for displaying the hold number of the special figure 2 in the effect display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. 2 hold icon display area 920 is provided, and in the special figure 1 hold icon display area 910, a third hold icon corresponding to the hold of the pre-reading notice target (for example, a type of “sphere system” other than “white” is displayed. Even when the hold icon is displayed, the display mode of the hold icon displayed in the special figure 2 hold icon display area 920 is not changed from the first hold icon of the default display mode.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the player may be able to easily specify the hold icon corresponding to the hold that is the target of the prefetch notice. In addition, according to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the anxiety given to the player by displaying the hold icon corresponding to the hold that may change the order of the change start in a manner not related to the pre-reading notice. May be reduced.

  Next, by using FIGS. 25 (g) to 25 (j), the effect of the pachinko machine 100 of the starting opening winning order variation that starts the special drawing changing game related to the holding of each of the special drawings 1 and 2 in the starting opening winning order. An example of display will be described. FIG. 25 (g) shows a state during the fluctuation period of the special figure 2 variable game. As shown in FIG. 25 (g), the special figure 2 display unit 214 displays the special figure 2 variable display, and the special figure 1 display unit 212 displays the special special figure 1 variable game stop symbol. Figure E is displayed. The special figure 1 holding lamp 218 lights the first to second LEDs from the left to indicate that the number of holdings in the special figure 1 is 3, and the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 is 1 from the left. The third LED is turned on to indicate that the number of holdings in FIG. 2 is three.

  The lower left area of the effect display area 208 d of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a variable icon display area 800. A horizontally long area below the effect display area 208d and adjacent to the right side of the variable icon display area 800 is a hold icon display area 900. In the hold icon display area 900, the number of hold of each special figure variable game can be notified according to the number of hold icons, and whether the hold is appropriate or not is notified with a predetermined reliability by the display mode of the hold icon (pre-reading notice) ) Is possible. The hold icon display area 900 of this example can display a maximum of 8 hold icons. The hold icon display area 900 is divided into eight areas, ie, a first area, a second area, a third area, a fourth area, a fifth area, a sixth area, a seventh area, and an eighth area from left to left. It is roughly divided. Each of the first to eighth areas corresponds to the first to eighth holding ranks of the special drawing.

  In the variation icon display area 800, a variation icon 801 corresponding to the special figure 2 variation game is displayed. The hold icon display area 900 has a hold icon 921 in the first area, a hold icon 922 in the second area, a hold icon 911 in the third area, a hold icon 923 in the fourth area, and a hold icon 912 in the fifth area. Are displayed.

  In this example, a white circular image is set as the default display mode of the fluctuation icon and the hold icon of the special figure 1, and a white square image is set as the default display mode of the fluctuation icon and the hold icon of the special figure 2. Yes. The hold icons 911 and 912 are hold icons corresponding to the hold in FIG. 1, and the hold icons 921 to 923 are hold icons corresponding to the hold in FIG.

  An icon change condition is established during the special figure 2 variable game. Based on the establishment of the icon change condition, the first sub-control unit 400 performs a process of changing the icon display mode. When the icon display mode of this example is changed, as shown in FIG. 25 (h), an effect moving image representing an explosion is displayed overlapping with the hold icon in a layer (front) above the hold icon display area 900. . The hold icon is temporarily hidden by the effect moving image. When the effect moving image is deleted, as shown in FIG. 25 (i), the hold icons 911 and 912 appear in the display mode of “Yoshimune (normal)” and the hold icon in the display mode of “爺 (normal)”. 921 and 923 appear, and a hold icon 922 appears in a red square image display mode.

  In this example, the hold icon corresponding to the pre-reading notice hold is displayed in a display form in which the display color is changed from the default display form. A hold icon 922 is a hold icon corresponding to the hold of the prefetch notice target.

  In addition, the display mode of the hold icon corresponding to the hold that is not subject to the pre-reading notice is selected from the type “character system”. For example, the display mode of “Yoshimune” is selected for the hold icon corresponding to the pre-reading notice non-target hold in FIG. 1, and the hold icon corresponding to the pre-reading notice non-holding hold in FIG. Is selected. In this way, the display mode of the hold icon corresponding to the hold that is not subject to the pre-reading notice may be different for each special figure.

  In this way, even if a plurality of special figure variation games are provided, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present example according to the winning order variation is subject to a prefetch advance notice according to the prefetch result of one special figure (for example, special figure 2). The hold icon (for example, hold icon 922) corresponding to the other hold is changed to the display mode of the pre-reading notice, and the hold icon (for example, hold icons 911, 912) corresponding to the other special figure (for example, special figure 1) is changed. You may change to the display mode (for example, the hold icon of the type “character system”) that is not subject to the pre-reading notice.

  In addition, after the icon change condition is established, the display mode of the hold icon may be divided into a hold icon corresponding to the pre-reading notice target hold and a hold icon corresponding to the pre-read notice non-hold hold. For example, as shown in FIG. 25 (j), the display mode of the hold icon 922 corresponding to the pre-reading notice target hold is changed to “Yoshimune (Kai)”, and the hold icon 911 corresponding to the pre-reading notice non-holding hold, The display mode of 912, 921, and 923 may be changed to “Yoshimune (ordinary)”. For example, if the advantage of jackpots differs for each special figure, if a pre-reading notice is notified about the suspension of a special figure with a high jackpot advantage, the launch of the game ball is stopped at the time of notification, or the advantage of the big hit If the pre-reading notice is notified about the holding of the special figure with a low degree, there is a possibility that the willingness to the subsequent game is lowered and the launch of the game ball is stopped. The pachinko machine 100 according to the present example makes it clear that the pre-reading notice target is on hold and it is difficult to determine which of the special figures 1 or 2 is the pre-reading notice hold. In some cases, it is possible to prevent excessive disappointment after the end of the change if excessive expectation at the time of the pre-reading notice and a change result are out of place while preventing the launch of the game ball based on this.

(Example 1-7)
FIG. 26 shows an example of effect display in Example 1-7 of this embodiment in time series. FIG. 26A shows a state during the fluctuation period of the special figure 1 variable game. In the special figure 1 display device 212, the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is performed, and in the special figure 2 display device 214, the special figure d which is a stop symbol of the latest special figure 2 fluctuation game is displayed. The special figure 1 holding lamp 218 lights up the first to second LEDs from the left to indicate that the number of holdings in the special figure 1 is two. The special figure 2 holding lamp 220 includes all the LEDs. Is turned off to indicate that the number of holds in FIG. 2 is zero.

  In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In the variation icon display area 800, a variation icon 801 corresponding to the special figure 1 variation game is displayed. The display mode of the fluctuation icon 801 is “white”. A hold icon 901 is displayed in the first area of the hold icon display area 900, and a hold icon 902 is displayed in the second area. The display modes of the hold icons 901 to 902 are all “white”.

  During the special figure 1 variable game, one game ball is won at the special figure 1 starting port 230, and the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 lights the third LED from the left, so that the special figure 1 is held 2 times. The increase from 3 to 3 is displayed. Further, the main control unit 300 executes the special figure prefetching process shown in FIG. 8 for the derived special figure 1 start information, and transmits a command including the prefetching result information to the first sub-control unit 400. In this example, since the gaming state is non-electric support, the increased start information of FIG. 1 is prefetched.

  The first sub-control unit 400 executes an icon display control process shown in FIG. The first sub-control unit 400 receives the command including the pre-read result information from the main control unit 300, and since the display modes of the hold icons 901 to 902 are all “white” as the default display mode, the display mode is being changed. It is determined that there is no icon, and it is determined that the lottery for determining whether or not to perform the pre-reading notice is won and the icon display mode change condition is satisfied, and the icon change scenario lottery process is executed.

  When the above processing ends, the hold increase animation shown in FIG. 26B is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. After the display of the hold increase animation, the hold icons 901 and 902 are displayed as shown in FIG. Is displayed in a display mode of “Yoshimune”, and the hold icon 903 is displayed in a display mode of “Princess (Normal)”. The hold icon 903 informs that the hold 3 is a pre-reading notice target in a display mode of “princess (ordinary)”, the hold icons 901 and 902 are “disappointed”, and the “princess (ordinary)” of the hold icon 903 is displayed. ”Is suggested.

  During the special figure 1 floating game, one game ball wins at the special figure 1 starting port 230, and the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 lights the fourth LED from the left so that the special figure 1 is held 3 times. The increase from 4 to 4 is displayed. The first sub-control unit 400 executes an icon display control process shown in FIG. The first sub-control unit 400 determines that there is an icon whose display mode is being changed, determines that the icon display mode changing condition is satisfied by winning a lottery that determines whether or not the pre-reading notice is executed, and has an icon whose display mode is being changed. And the display mode of the hold icon corresponding to the increased hold is set to “Musu”, which is the same as the display mode of the hold icons 901 and 902 corresponding to the existing pre-reading notice non-target hold.

  When the above processing is completed, the hold increase animation shown in FIG. 26 (d) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. After the display of the hold increase animation, the hold icons 901 and 902 are displayed as shown in FIG. 26 (e). , 904 are displayed in the display mode of “Musu”, and the hold icon 903 is displayed in the display mode of “Princess (Normal)”.

  After a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the special figure 1 variable game ends. As shown in FIG. 26 (e), the special figure E (displacement) is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212, and the symbol display areas 208a to 208c have symbol combinations “decorations other than the symbol combination for notifying the winning. “2-decoration 3-decoration 3” is stopped and displayed. In the fluctuation icon display area 800, the deletion animation of the fluctuation icon 803 is started, and the fluctuation icon 801 is deleted by the deletion animation in the default mode.

  After a predetermined time has elapsed since the special figure 1 display device 212 stopped and displayed, the next special figure 1 variable game is started. As shown in FIG. 26 (f), the special figure 1 display device 212 starts the variable display of special figure 1, and the decorative display variable display starts in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 indicates that the hold in the special figure 1 has decreased from 4 to 3 by turning off the fourth LED from the left.

  Further, in the icon display control process executed at the start of the special figure 1 variable game, it is determined that the number of reserved memories in the special figure 1 has decreased, so the hold icon display position changing process is executed. Thereby, the hold icons 902 to 904 are displayed at predetermined positions. Further, in this example, the display mode of the fluctuation icon of the fluctuation related to the notice non-target is set to “white”.

  Moreover, the display mode of the hold icon corresponding to the hold of the pre-reading notice non-target may be changed at the start of the change to suggest the reliability of the hold icon corresponding to the hold of the pre-reading notice target. In this example, the hold icon corresponding to the hold with a later hold order has a reliability closer to the display mode of the hold icon corresponding to the hold to be read ahead than the hold icon corresponding to the hold with the previous hold order. The display mode suggests reliability. In this example, as shown in FIG. 26 (f), the display mode of the hold icon 902 is changed to “Yoshimune (ordinary)”, and the display mode of the hold icon 904 is changed to “Yoshimune (Kai)”. The reliability of “Yoshimune (Kai)” is set closer to the reliability of “Hime (Normal)” than the reliability of “Yoshimune (Normal)”.

  By doing so, it becomes easier for the person who has accumulated a lot of holdings to know the degree of reliability of the pre-reading notice, and even after the notice of the pre-reading notice is started, the game ball is given to the player. There may be a case where more game balls can be launched without stopping.

  During the special figure 1 floating game, one game ball wins at the special figure 1 starting port 230, and the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 lights the fourth LED from the left so that the special figure 1 is held 3 times. The increase from 4 to 4 is displayed. In this example, as shown in FIG. 26 (g), the effect moving image representing the explosion is displayed overlapping with the hold icon 905 in a layer (front) above the hold icon 905 corresponding to the increased hold. . The hold icon 905 is temporarily hidden by the effect moving image. When the effect moving image is deleted, as shown in FIG. 26H, a hold icon 905 whose display mode is changed to “Yoshimune (Kai)” appears. In this example, the hold icon 905 corresponding to the newly increased hold after the change in the display mode of the hold icon 904 corresponding to the hold that is not subject to the pre-reading notice is “Yoshimune (Kai)” similar to the hold icon 904. It is displayed in the display mode.

  FIG. 26 (i) shows a state just before the end of the change of the notice target. When the notice target changes, the change icon is displayed in the same manner as the hold icon 903 displayed when the notice target change is held. For this reason, the display mode of the fluctuation icon 804 is “princess”. Further, in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the symbol combination “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” for notifying the big hit is temporarily stopped, and fluctuation of the temporarily stopped symbol combination is performed (in the figure, the vertical direction). Indicated by a double arrow). During this fluctuation, the display mode of the change icon 804 is changed to “Princess (Nikkori)”, the display mode of the hold icons 904 and 905 is changed to “Yoshimune”, and a blessing action ( Blessing).

  The special figure 1 variable game is ended after a predetermined time has elapsed from the start of the notice subject change, and as shown in FIG. 26 (j), special figure A (16R special big hit) is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the symbol combination “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” for notifying the big hit is stopped and displayed. Further, the display mode of the hold icons 904 and 905 corresponding to the hold that is not subject to the pre-reading notice is changed to the default display mode (“white”) in accordance with the change stop.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment includes a hold icon (hold icon 901, 902) corresponding to the hold before the pre-reading notice target hold, and a hold icon (hold icon 904, 905) corresponding to the hold after the pre-read notice target hold. ) Is changed from the default display mode.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the number of hold icons changed from the default mode increases as the number of holds increases, so that it is possible to encourage the player to launch game balls and promote the operation of the game table. There are cases where it is possible. Further, according to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, by giving the player a sense of expectation about the hold after the hold of the pre-reading notice target, it is possible to prevent the stop and promote the player to launch a game ball. There are cases where it is possible. Further, in a gaming machine in which the hold icon is erased at the start of change, the player's expectation regarding the lottery result can be increased by changing the mode of the hold icon held after the change.

(Example 1-8)
FIG. 27 shows an example of effect display in Example 1-8 of the present embodiment in time series. FIG. 27A shows a state during the fluctuation period of the special figure 1 variable game. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 lights the first to third LEDs from the left to indicate that the special figure 1 hold number is 3, and the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 includes all the LEDs. Is turned off to indicate that the number of holds in FIG. 2 is zero.

  In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In the variation icon display area 800, a variation icon 801 corresponding to the special figure 1 variation game is displayed. The display mode of the fluctuation icon 801 is “white”. A hold icon 901 is displayed in the first area of the hold icon display area 900, a hold icon 902 is displayed in the second area, and a hold icon 903 is displayed in the third area. The display modes of the hold icons 901 to 903 are all “white”.

  During the special figure 1 floating game, one game ball wins at the special figure 1 starting port 230, and the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 lights the fourth LED from the left so that the special figure 1 is held 3 times. The increase from 4 to 4 is displayed. Further, the main control unit 300 executes the special figure prefetching process shown in FIG. 8 for the derived special figure 1 start information, and transmits a command including the prefetching result information to the first sub-control unit 400. In this example, since the gaming state is non-electric support, the increased start information of FIG. 1 is prefetched.

  The first sub-control unit 400 executes an icon display control process shown in FIG. The first sub control unit 400 receives the command including the prefetch result information from the main control unit 300, and the display mode of the hold icons 901 to 903 is the default display mode “white”. It is determined that there is no icon, and it is determined that the icon display mode change condition is satisfied by winning the lottery for determining whether or not the pre-reading notice can be executed, and the icon change scenario lottery process is executed.

  In this example, in the icon change scenario lottery process, the scenario No. Fourteen patterns 3 (see FIGS. 16 and 17) are selected. For this reason, at the time of winning a prize, the display mode of the hold icon 901 corresponding to the hold 1 that is not subject to the advance notice is “white”, the display form of the hold icon 902 corresponding to the hold 2 that is not subject to the advance notice is “blue”, The display mode of the hold icon 903 corresponding to the hold 3 is determined to be “green”, the display mode of the hold icon 904 corresponding to the hold 4 to be notified is determined to be “red”, and the display mode of the fluctuation icon 801 is “ “White”.

  When the above processing is completed, as shown in FIG. 27B, the hold increase animation is displayed in the effect display area 208d so as to overlap the hold icon, and when the hold increase animation is ended, as shown in FIG. In addition, a “white” display mode hold icon 901, a “blue” display mode hold icon 902, a “green” display mode hold icon 903, and a “red” display mode hold icon 904 respectively appear.

  The reliability of the hold icon is set to increase in the order of “white”, “blue”, “green”, and “red”. Scenario No. In the pattern 3 of 14, the display mode of the hold icon corresponding to the hold that is not subject to the pre-reading notice is determined so that the reliability gradually increases as the hold rank becomes later. As described above, the display mode of the hold icon corresponding to the hold of the pre-reading notice non-target may be changed so as to increase the reliability step by step toward the hold order of the pre-reading notice target.

  FIGS. 27D to 27E show states during the fluctuation period of the special figure 1 variable game started after the hold corresponding to the hold icon 903 has been consumed. When the hold after the pre-reading notice target hold increases, the hold icon 905 may be displayed in the default display form “white” as shown in FIG. In addition, as shown in FIG. 27E, in order to make the pre-reading notice target hold more conspicuous, the reliability is lower than the display mode “red” of the hold icon 904 corresponding to the pre-read notice target hold, “green” ”May display the hold icon 905, and“ blue ”may display the hold icon 906. Of course, the hold icon 907 may be displayed in the default display mode “white”.

  FIG. 27 (f) shows a state after the change of the notice target is completed. As shown in FIG. 27 (f), the special figure E (displacement) is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212, and the symbol display areas 208a to 208c have symbol combinations “decorations other than the symbol combination for notifying the winning. “5-decoration 6-decoration 5” is stopped and displayed. In the variation icon display area 800, the variation icon 805 is deleted in a default mode (for example, a mode in which the transmittance of the variation icon gradually increases). Further, the display mode of the hold icons 905 and 906 corresponding to the hold that is not subject to the pre-reading notice is changed to the default display mode (“white”) in response to the change stop.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment changes the display mode of the hold icon corresponding to the pre-reading notice non-target hold in accordance with the pre-reading notice hold result. In addition, after changing the display mode of the hold icon, the hold icon corresponding to the hold that is not subject to the pre-reading notice is displayed in the display type of the same type (for example, “sphere system”) as the hold icon corresponding to the hold that is subject to the pre-reading notice. Is done.

  Also, the display mode of the hold icon corresponding to the hold of the pre-reading notice non-mode is changed only when the prefetching notice result is a big hit. Even if the prefetching notice result is not a big hit, the display mode of the hold icon corresponding to the prefetching notice non-holding may be changed, or the prefetching notice result is a big hit. In addition, it is not necessary to change the display mode of the hold icon corresponding to the hold that is not subject to the prefetching notice.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, there is a case where the hold icon can be displayed lively by improving the frequency of occurrence of the prefetching notice of the gasse after the prefetching notice is executed. In addition, in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, when a plurality of hold icons in the display form of the prefetch notice are displayed, the special figure variable game related to the hold of the prefetch notice target becomes a big hit. In some cases, it is possible to improve the sense of expectation of the player and to promote the launch of the game ball by the player.

(Example 1-9)
FIG. 28 shows an example of effect display in Example 1-9 of the present embodiment in time series. FIG. 28A shows a state during the fluctuation period of the special figure 1 variable game. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 lights the first to third LEDs from the left to indicate that the special figure 1 hold number is 3, and the special figure 2 hold lamp 220 includes all the LEDs. Is turned off to indicate that the number of holds in FIG. 2 is zero.

  An icon change condition is established during the special figure 1 variable game. Based on the establishment of the icon change condition, the first sub-control unit 400 performs a process of changing the icon display mode. When the icon display mode of this example is changed, as shown in FIG. 28B, an effect moving image representing an explosion is displayed overlapping with the hold icon in a layer (front) above the hold icon display area 900. . The hold icon is temporarily hidden by the effect moving image. When the effect moving image is deleted, the hold icons 901 to 903 whose display modes are changed appear as shown in FIG.

  In this example, in order to make the hold of the prefetch notice target stand out, the display size of the hold icon corresponding to the prefetch notice hold is enlarged and the display color is changed. For example, if the hold indicated by the hold icon 902 is a hold for the pre-reading notice, the display size of the hold icon 902 is enlarged and displayed in “red” as shown in FIG. As described above, the display size may be increased in the change of the display mode of the hold icon corresponding to the hold of the prefetch notice target.

  Also, reduce the display size, change the display color of the hold icon corresponding to the hold of the pre-reading notice target and the display color of complementary color (opposite color, contrast color), or change the display color to black, gray that is not noticeable Then, the hold icons 901 and 903 corresponding to the hold that is not subject to the pre-reading notice may be displayed. Further, the hold icon corresponding to the hold that is not subject to the pre-reading notice may be hidden, or the transmittance of the hold icon may be increased. Further, the hold icon corresponding to the hold for which the pre-reading notice is not applicable may be displayed away from the hold icon corresponding to the hold for the pre-reading notice. In this way, not only the display mode of the hold icon corresponding to the hold of the pre-reading notice target is changed, but also the display mode of the hold icon corresponding to the hold of the non-pre-reading notice target is changed to cope with the hold of the pre-reading notice target. You may perform the production which makes the hold icon to stand out stand out.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, there is a case where the pre-reading notice target can be further conspicuous. In addition, according to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, it is possible to increase the expectation for the hold of the pre-reading notice target while avoiding giving an excessive expectation to the pre-reading notice non-holding by executing the prefetching notice. There is a case. In addition, according to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, it may be possible to easily identify the hold for the pre-reading notice target.

(Example 1-10)
FIG. 29 shows an example of effect display in Example 1-10 of the present embodiment. FIG. 29A shows a state during the fluctuation period of the special figure 1 variable game that is not subject to the notice. In this example, the hold 1 indicated by the hold icon 901 is the hold for the prefetch notice.

  When the notice is not subject to change, the change icon 801 is displayed in a display form of “爺 (commentary)”. “爺 (commentary)” is used as a commentary character for explaining the game. In this example, the change icon 801 is forewarned that the production of the swordsman confrontation (Super Reach B) will be executed when the special figure 1 variable game related to the hold 1 is executed. "爺" is displayed. The change icon 801 displayed in the display mode of the commentary character notifies the effect performed in the pre-reading notice subject change notice. When notifying the notice of the special figure variable game that is held rather than the special figure variable game being executed, the variable icon may be displayed in the display mode of the commentary character. Moreover, when a hold icon alert | reports about hold other than itself, the said hold icon may be displayed in the display mode of an explanatory character. In addition, if there are multiple pre-reading notice non-target holds that are higher than the pre-reading notice target hold, when the special figure change game is executed due to the use of the pre-reading notice non-target hold, the display style of the commentary character will change. An icon may be displayed, and the notice content of the variable icon may be developed step by step as the hold order for the pre-read notice target increases. Further, using the hold icon that is not subject to the pre-reading notice, the commentary effect may be performed outside the fluctuation period of the special figure variable game.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present example, a player with a lot of hold icons displayed can play a lively game, so that the player can aim to increase the hold while improving the interest of the game. Can be promoted. Further, according to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present example, since the pre-reading notice is executed, there is a case where the player can be made to pay attention again to the hold icon corresponding to the hold that is not subject to the pre-reading notice. is there.

  Further, the effect using the commentary character may be executed at a plurality of points (starting points of various effects) of the game. FIG. 29 (b) shows a state during the execution of the swordsman showdown. At the time of the execution of the swordsman confrontation, using the comment character icon 850 having the display form of “爺 (commentary)” in the effect display area 208d, an effect may be performed that makes the player expect to win a big hit with the change. . In the example shown in FIG. 29 (b), the comment character icon 850 displays a line saying "If you don't wear an aura, your chances will be up", and an effect is made to expect Yoshimune to win the swordsman.

  FIG. 29C shows a state in which a big hit game is being played. During the big hit game, the current round and the type of the winning decorative symbol are shown. In this example, “11R” indicating the current round and “decoration 7” of the selected decorative symbol are displayed in the effect display area 208d.

  During the big hit game, an explanation character icon 850 having a display mode of “爺 (commentary)” is executed to suggest the next winning. As the comment character icon 850, “If the shrine is able to perform a big board for the townsman, it will be a renso!” Suggests the next winning.

  The production using the commentary character may be executed not only during the game but also during the non-game. The term “in the game” here may be a period in which the player is firing a game ball toward the game board 200, or a special figure based on the game ball entering the special figure starting ports 230 and 232. It may be a period in which an operation based on a variable game or a special figure variable game (for example, a jackpot game) is performed. FIG. 29 (d) shows a state during a demonstration effect that is executed during a non-game. In this example, a demonstration effect for explaining a game start method is executed. In the effect display area 208d, an image representing the pachinko machine 100, an image representing the ball lending machine (sand), and an image of a white arrow pointing to the bill slot of the ball lending machine are displayed. The display of the comment character icon 850, “To start a game, put money in the sand.” Is displayed, explaining the game start method. As in this example, there is a case where the commentary effect using the commentary character is executed even during the demonstration effect. In addition, an explanation character may be displayed as the hold icon, and in that case, a plurality of explanation characters may be displayed simultaneously. Further, as described above, a commentary character may be used with a plurality of elements, or a commentary character may be displayed with only one element (for example, a variation icon).

(Example 1-11)
FIG. 30 shows an example of effect display in Example 1-11 of the present embodiment in time series. FIG. 30A shows a state during the fluctuation period of the special figure 1 variable game. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 lights the first to second LEDs from the left to indicate that the number of the special figure 1 hold is two.

  In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In the variation icon display area 800, a variation icon 801 corresponding to the special figure 1 variation game is displayed. The display mode of the fluctuation icon 801 is “white”.

  In this example, a first hold icon display area 930 is provided below the effect display area 208d as an area for displaying the number of holds in FIG. 1 by the hold icon, and a second hold is provided to the right of the effect display area 208d. An icon display area 940 is provided. Both the first hold icon display area 930 and the second hold icon display area 940 display the number of holds shown in FIG. The number of holds shown in FIG. 2 may be displayed together in the first hold icon display area 930 and the second hold icon display area 940. Since the first hold icon display area 930 is the same as the hold icon display area 900 described above, detailed description thereof is omitted. A hold icon 901 is displayed in the first area of the first hold icon display area 930, and a hold icon 902 is displayed in the second area. The display modes of the hold icons 901 to 902 are all “white”.

  The second hold icon display area 940 can display one or more hold icons. In the second hold icon display area 940, it is possible to notify the hold number of the special figure 1 variable game according to the number of hold icons. In this example, a total of two hold icons, a hold icon 941 and a hold icon 942, are displayed in the second hold icon display area 940, and it is notified that the number of hold of the special figure 1 variable game is two. Yes.

  Thus, in the effect display area 208d of the decorative symbol display device 208 of this example, the number of special figure 1 variable games held is displayed at a plurality of locations of the first hold icon display area 930 and the second hold icon display area 940. Has been. In addition, in the first and second hold icon display areas 930 and 940 of this example, only the hold icon of FIG. 1 is displayed, but the hold icon of FIG. 2 may be displayed together.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 30A, the hold icons 901 and 902 displayed in the first hold icon display area 930 and the hold icons 941 and 942 displayed in the second hold icon display area 940 are both It is displayed in a display form of graphics of the same color and the same type (for example, white circles).

  During the special figure 1 variable game, one game ball is won at the special figure 1 starting port 230, and the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 lights the third LED from the left, so that the special figure 1 is held 2 times. The increase from 3 to 3 is displayed. Further, the main control unit 300 executes the special figure prefetching process shown in FIG. 8 for the derived special figure 1 start information, and transmits a command including the prefetching result information to the first sub-control unit 400. In this example, since the gaming state is non-electric support, the increased start information of FIG. 1 is prefetched.

  The first sub-control unit 400 executes icon display control processing. The first sub-control unit 400 receives a command including pre-read result information from the main control unit 300, determines that there is no icon whose display mode is being changed, and wins a lottery to determine whether or not pre-reading notice execution is possible, and changes the icon display mode It is determined that the condition is satisfied, and icon change scenario lottery processing is executed.

  In the present embodiment, when the prefetch notice condition is satisfied, the first sub-control unit 400 changes the display mode of the hold icon displayed in the first hold icon display area 930 and executes the prefetch notice, and the second hold icon The display mode of the hold icon displayed in the display area 940 is not changed from the default display mode (in this example, a white circular image). For this reason, in the icon change scenario lottery process, a change scenario of the display mode of the hold icon displayed in the first hold icon display area 930 is determined.

  In this example, in the icon change scenario lottery process, at the time of winning a prize, the display mode of the hold icon 901 corresponding to the non-preliminary hold 1 is “Yoshimune (ordinary)”, and the hold icon 902 corresponding to the non-preserve hold 2 Is displayed as “Yoshimune (ordinary)”, and the display mode of the hold icon 903 corresponding to the hold 3 to be notified is determined to be “blue”.

  When the above processing is completed, the hold increase animation shown in FIG. 30B is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. After the display of the hold increase animation is finished, as shown in FIG. “Yoshimune (ordinary)” is displayed in the display mode, the hold icon 902 is displayed in the “Yoshimune (normal)” display mode, and the hold icon 903 is displayed in the “blue” display mode.

  Further, the hold icon in the second hold icon display area 940 continues to be displayed even during the hold increase animation display. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 30B, the hold icons 931 and 932 corresponding to the existing hold and the hold icon 933 corresponding to the increased hold are displayed in the second hold icon display area 940.

  In this example, as shown in FIGS. 30B and 30C, the display mode of the hold icon displayed in the first hold icon display area 930 changes and the hold displayed in the second hold icon display area 940. The icon display mode does not change.

  Further, the display mode of the hold icon displayed in the second hold icon display area 940 is changed separately from the display mode of the hold icon displayed in the first hold icon display area 930, and the first hold icon display area A prefetching notice independent of the prefetching notice by the hold icon displayed in 930 may be executed using the hold icon displayed in the second hold icon display area 940.

  In addition, in the second hold icon display area 940, the number of hold of the special figure variable game is not displayed depending on the number of hold icons to be displayed, but as shown in FIG. Then, the reserved number of special figure variable games may be displayed by an image representing “3”.

  Further, the default display mode of the hold icon displayed in the first hold icon display area 930 may be different from the default display mode of the hold icon displayed in the second hold icon display area 940. For example, as shown in FIG. 30 (e), the hold icon displayed in the second hold icon display area 940 may be displayed as a white square image. As described above, the default display mode of the hold icon may be different between the first hold icon display area 930 and the second hold icon display area 940.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment changes the display mode of the hold icon displayed in the first hold icon display area 930 during execution of the prefetch notice, and displays the hold icon displayed in the second hold icon display area 940. The mode is not changed. According to the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, it may be possible to prevent the misrecognition of the number of operation holding balls (the number of holdings) caused by changing the mode of the holding icon.

(Example 1-12)
FIG. 31 shows an example of effect display in Example 1-12 of the present embodiment in time series. FIG. 31A shows a state during the fluctuation period of the special figure 1 variable game. The special figure 1 display device 212 displays the special figure 2 variation display, and the special figure 2 display device 214 displays the special figure d which is a stop symbol of the latest special figure 2 variable game. The special figure 1 holding lamp 218 lights up the first to second LEDs from the left to indicate that the number of holdings in the special figure 1 is two. The special figure 2 holding lamp 220 includes all the LEDs. Is turned off to indicate that the number of holds in FIG. 2 is zero.

  In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In the variation icon display area 800, a variation icon 801 corresponding to the special figure 1 variation game is displayed. The display mode of the fluctuation icon 801 is “white”. A hold icon 901 is displayed in the first area of the hold icon display area 900, and a hold icon 902 is displayed in the second area. The display modes of the hold icons 901 to 902 are all “white”.

  During the special figure 1 variable game, one game ball is won at the special figure 1 starting port 230, and the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 lights the third LED from the left, so that the special figure 1 is held 2 times. The increase from 3 to 3 is displayed. Further, the main control unit 300 executes the special figure prefetching process shown in FIG. 8 for the derived special figure 1 start information, and transmits a command including the prefetching result information to the first sub-control unit 400. In this example, since the gaming state is non-electric support, the increased start information of FIG. 1 is prefetched.

  The first sub-control unit 400 executes icon display control processing. The first sub-control unit 400 receives a command including pre-read result information from the main control unit 300, determines that there is no icon whose display mode is being changed, and wins a lottery to determine whether or not pre-reading notice execution is possible, and changes the icon display mode It is determined that the condition is satisfied, and icon change scenario lottery processing is executed.

  In this example, in the icon change scenario lottery process, at the time of winning a prize, the display mode of the hold icon 901 corresponding to the non-preliminary hold 1 is “Yoshimune (ordinary)”, and the hold icon 902 corresponding to the non-preserve hold 2 Is displayed as “Yoshimune (ordinary)”, and the display mode of the hold icon 903 corresponding to the hold 3 to be notified is determined as “blue”.

  When the above processing is completed, the reserved increase animation shown in FIG. 31 (b) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In this example, an effect moving image representing an explosion as a hold increase animation is displayed overlapping with the hold icon in a layer (front) above the hold icon display area 900. The hold icon is temporarily hidden by the effect moving image.

  As shown in FIG. 31 (c), the effect moving image gradually contracts, and among the hold icons 901 to 903, first, the hold icon 901 having the display mode of “Yoshimune” corresponding to the hold that is not subject to the pre-reading notice. Becomes visible. Next, when the effect moving image is further contracted and erased, as shown in FIG. 31 (d), a hold icon 902 with a display mode of “Yoshimune” and a hold icon 903 with a display mode of “blue” are visible. become.

  As described above, there is a case where the hold icon 901 corresponding to the pre-reading notice target hold becomes visible before the hold icon 903 corresponding to the pre-reading notice target hold by the hold increase animation. On the other hand, there may be a case where the hold icon corresponding to the pre-reading notice target hold becomes visible before the hold icon corresponding to the pre-reading notice non-holding object by the hold increasing animation. The time when the hold icon corresponding to the hold of the pre-reading notice target becomes visible and the time when the hold icon corresponding to the pre-reading notice non-holding becomes visible depends on the display position of the hold icon based on the hold order. There is a case.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 31 (e) to 31 (h), a modified example of the effect at the time of displaying the hold increase animation will be described. During the special figure 1 variable game shown in FIG. 31 (e), one game ball wins at the special figure 1 start port 230. Further, the main control unit 300 executes the special figure prefetching process shown in FIG. 8 for the derived special figure 1 start information, and transmits a command including the prefetching result information to the first sub-control unit 400. In this example, since the gaming state is non-electric support, the increased start information of FIG. 1 is prefetched.

  The first sub-control unit 400 executes icon display control processing. The first sub-control unit 400 receives a command including pre-read result information from the main control unit 300, determines that there is no icon whose display mode is being changed, and wins a lottery to determine whether or not pre-reading notice execution is possible, and changes the icon display mode It is determined that the condition is satisfied, and icon change scenario lottery processing is executed.

  When the above processing is completed, the reserved increase animation shown in FIG. 31 (f) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In this example, as the hold increase animation, the hold icon overlaps with the hold icon in the layer above this hold icon display area 900 (front), and the third area where the hold icon corresponding to the increased hold is displayed is the center. An effect moving image representing an explosion is displayed so as to overlap part of the second area and the fourth area. A part of the hold icon 902 displayed in the second area is hidden by the effect moving image, and the hold icon displayed in the third area becomes invisible.

  As shown in FIG. 31 (g), in the hold increase animation of this example, the display size of the effect moving image representing the explosion gradually increases, and the hold icon 902 displayed in the second area cannot be visually recognized. Thus, as shown in FIG. 31 (h), the hold icon 901 displayed in the first area becomes almost invisible.

  Thus, in the hold increase animation of this example, as the display size of the effect moving image increases, the hold icon corresponding to the pre-reading notice non-holding gradually becomes difficult to visually recognize.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 31 (i) to 31 (l), a modified example of the effect at the time of the on-hold increase animation display is described. During the special figure 1 variable game shown in FIG. 31 (i), one game ball wins the special figure 1 starting port 230. Further, the main control unit 300 executes the special figure prefetching process shown in FIG. 8 for the derived special figure 1 start information, and transmits a command including the prefetching result information to the first sub-control unit 400. In this example, since the gaming state is non-electric support, the increased start information of FIG. 1 is prefetched.

  The first sub-control unit 400 executes icon display control processing. The first sub-control unit 400 receives a command including pre-read result information from the main control unit 300, determines that there is no icon whose display mode is being changed, and wins a lottery to determine whether or not pre-reading notice execution is possible, and changes the icon display mode It is determined that the condition is satisfied, and icon change scenario lottery processing is executed.

  In this example, in the icon change scenario lottery process, at the time of winning a prize, the display mode of the hold icon 901 corresponding to the non-preliminary hold 1 is “Yoshimune (ordinary)”, and the hold icon 902 corresponding to the non-preserve hold 2 Is displayed as “Yoshimune (ordinary)”, and the display mode of the hold icon 903 corresponding to the hold 3 to be notified is determined as “blue”.

  When the above processing is completed, the reserved increase animation shown in FIG. 31 (j) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In this example, as the hold increase animation, the hold icon overlaps with the hold icon in the layer above this hold icon display area 900 (front), and the third area where the hold icon corresponding to the increased hold is displayed is the center. An effect moving image representing an explosion is displayed so as to overlap all of the second area, the fourth area, and a part of the first area. A part of the hold icon 901 displayed in the first area is hidden by the effect moving image, and the hold icon 902 displayed in the second area becomes invisible.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 31 (j), in the hold increase animation of this example, the display size of the effect moving image representing the explosion is reduced so that the entire hold icon 901 displayed in the first area can be visually recognized. Thus, a part of the hold icon 902 displayed in the second area becomes visible.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 31 (k), the display size of the effect moving image is further reduced, the entire hold icon 902 displayed in the second area becomes visible, and the hold displayed in the third area. A part of the icon 903 becomes visible.

  The effect moving image contracts to the center of the hold icon 903, and as shown in FIG. 31 (l), the hold icon 903 corresponding to the hold of the pre-reading notice target is finally visible as a whole.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, when the display mode of the hold icon is changed, the hold icon corresponding to the hold of the pre-reading notice target and the hold icon corresponding to the hold of the non-pre-reading notice target are different from each other. Yes.

(Example 1-13)
FIG. 32 shows an example of effect display in Example 1-13 of the present embodiment in time series. FIG. 32A shows a state during the variation period of the special figure 1 variable game. The special figure 1 holding lamp 218 lights up the first to second LEDs from the left to indicate that the number of holdings in the special figure 1 is two. The special figure 2 holding lamp 220 includes all the LEDs. Is turned off to indicate that the number of holds in FIG. 2 is zero.

  In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In the variation icon display area 800, a variation icon 801 corresponding to the special figure 1 variation game is displayed. The display mode of the fluctuation icon 801 is “white”. A hold icon 901 is displayed in the first area of the hold icon display area 900, and a hold icon 902 is displayed in the second area. The display modes of the hold icons 901 to 902 are all “white”.

  During execution of the special figure 1 variable game, “decoration 5” is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a and 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIG. In this variation, a variation timer (variation time) belonging to the timer group 7 is selected, and super reach B (swordsman confrontation) is executed in the reach effect.

  As shown in FIG. 32C, when the reach effect of Super Reach B (Swordsman Confrontation) is started, the hold icon is not displayed in the effect display area 208d. One game ball wins the special figure 1 start port 230 when the reach effect of the super reach B when the hold icon is not displayed, and the special figure 1 hold lamp 218 is 3 from the left as shown in FIG. By turning on the second LED, it is displayed that the hold in FIG. 1 has increased from 2 to 3.

  Further, the main control unit 300 executes the special figure prefetching process shown in FIG. 8 for the derived special figure 1 start information, and transmits a command including the prefetching result information to the first sub-control unit 400. In this example, since the gaming state is non-electric support, the increased start information of FIG. 1 is prefetched.

  The first sub-control unit 400 executes icon display control processing. The first sub-control unit 400 receives the command including the prefetch result information from the main control unit 300, determines that the prefetch notice is not being executed, and wins the lottery to determine whether or not the prefetch notice can be executed. It is determined that the change condition is satisfied, and icon change scenario lottery processing is executed.

  In this example, in the icon change scenario lottery process, at the time of winning a prize, the display mode of the hold icon 901 corresponding to the non-preliminary hold 1 is “Yoshimune (ordinary)”, and the hold icon 902 corresponding to the non-preserve hold 2 Is displayed as “Yoshimune (ordinary)”, and the display mode of the hold icon 903 corresponding to the hold 3 to be notified is determined as “blue”.

  Further, the first sub-control unit 400 may control the speaker 120 to output a predetermined sound effect (for example, a sound effect of “docan”) after the icon display control process ends.

  When the reach effect is finished, as shown in FIG. 32 (e), the special figure E (displacement) is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212, and the symbol combinations for notifying the symbol display areas 208a to 208c are displayed. The symbol combination “decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5” other than is stopped and displayed. In addition, with the end of the reach effect, the display of the change icon and the hold icon is resumed. At the time of this restart, the display mode of the hold icon is changed based on the result of the icon change scenario lottery process. The hold icons 901 and 902 are each displayed in a display mode of “Yoshimune (ordinary)”, and the hold icon 903 is displayed in a display mode of “blue”.

  FIG. 32 (f) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game related to the hold of the pre-reading notice object displayed by the hold icon 903 is executed after three changes from the state shown in FIG. 32 (e). Show. The variation icon 804 is displayed in the same display mode “blue” as the hold icon 903. In addition, two game balls win the special figure 1 starting port 230 during the three fluctuations, and the special figure 1 variable game hold number is two. The start information of FIG. 1 increased by the winning is not prefetched, and the hold icons 904 and 905 corresponding to the increased hold are displayed in a display mode of “Yoshimune (ordinary)”.

  In addition, “decoration 5—decoration 6—decoration 6” is stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c, and an effect of pseudo fluctuation is executed. As shown in FIG. 32 (g), the decorative symbol variation display is resumed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and then the effect of super reach B (swordsman confrontation) is started as shown in FIG. 32 (h). . In this example, as shown in FIG. 32 (i), it is displayed in the effect display area 208d that Yoshimune has lost in the swordsman confrontation, the reach effect ends, and as shown in FIG. 32 (j), the symbol display area In 208a to 208c, a symbol combination “decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5” other than the symbol combination for notifying the winning is displayed.

  In addition, during the hold icon non-display period during the execution of Super Reach B, the first sub-control unit may set the display mode of the hold icons 904 and 905 to “white” as the default display mode. For this reason, when the effect of Super Reach B is finished and the display of the hold icon is resumed, hold icons 904 and 905 in the display mode of “white” may be displayed as shown in FIG. .

Next, the characteristic configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the first embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 32 again.
(1) The pachinko machine 100 is
A symbol display means (for example, special figure 1 display device 212, special figure 2 display device 214) capable of executing at least a symbol variation display;
A holding display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) capable of displaying at least a plurality of types of holding icons;
First control means (for example, main control unit 300) capable of controlling at least the symbol display means;
A second control means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400) capable of at least controlling the hold display means;
A game machine equipped with
The holding display means is capable of displaying at least an increase in the holding icon when a holding increase condition is established (a winning of a game ball to the special figure 1 starting port 230 or the special figure 2 starting port),
At least one of the plurality of types of hold icons is a first hold icon (for example, a hold icon in a default display mode),
At least one of the plurality of types of hold icons is a second hold icon (for example, a hold icon that is not subject to pre-reading notice),
At least one of the plurality of types of hold icons is a third hold icon (for example, a hold icon subject to prefetching notice),
The second control means is capable of at least executing the first control when a first condition (for example, winning in the pre-reading notice execution possibility determination lottery (Yes in step S905)) is established.
The second control means can execute at least the second control when the second condition is satisfied,
The first control is a control for causing the hold display means to display the third hold icon as the prefetching notice,
The second control is a control for causing the hold display means to display the second hold icon instead of the first hold icon,
The second condition is a condition that may be satisfied when the first hold icon is displayed on the hold display means.
The second condition is a condition that may be satisfied when the first condition is satisfied.
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100, it may be possible to emphasize that the pre-reading notice has been executed and prevent the first hold icon as the pre-reading notice from being overlooked. Further, according to the pachinko machine 100, there is a case where the player can be expected to hold the hold icon by changing the mode of the hold icon corresponding to the hold that is not subject to the pre-reading notice. Further, according to the pachinko machine 100, when two or more hold icons are displayed, one hold icon is displayed in the third hold icon mode, and the other hold icon is displayed in the second hold icon mode. Since it is displayed, it may be possible to prevent the player from stopping and promote the operation of the game table.

(2) The pachinko machine 100,
Provided with a notice information means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) capable of at least executing a prefetch notice;
The first control means is capable of at least transmitting command information to the second control means,
The second control means can execute at least a control for notifying the notice notice means of the prefetch notice when the result of the prefetch notice execution determination using the command information is a specific result (for example, hit). And
The second control means can execute at least the third control when the third condition is satisfied,
The third condition is when a plurality of the first hold icons (hereinafter referred to as “plural first hold icons”) are displayed on the hold display means, and the second condition is satisfied. Is a condition that may hold,
The third control is a control for causing the hold display means to display at least the second hold icon instead of at least one of the plurality of first hold icons.
The third control is a control for causing the hold display means to display at least a fourth hold icon instead of at least one of the plurality of first hold icons,
The display mode of the fourth hold icon is a display mode different from the display mode of the second hold icon.
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100, the hold icon corresponding to the hold that is the target of the pre-reading notice becomes clearer, so that the player's expectation may be maintained until the change of the hold starts.

(3) The pachinko machine 100,
The display mode of the second hold icon is the same display mode as the display mode of the first hold icon.
It is characterized by that.

(4) The pachinko machine 100,
The second control means is capable of at least performing the fourth control when the fourth condition is satisfied,
The fourth condition is a condition that may be satisfied when the plurality of first hold icons are displayed on the hold display unit and the second condition is satisfied,
The fourth control is a control for causing the hold display means to display the second hold icon instead of one hold icon of the plurality of first hold icons,
The fourth control is a control that causes the hold display means to display the fourth hold icon instead of one hold icon of the plurality of first hold icons,
The display mode of the third hold icon is a display mode different from the display mode of the second hold icon,
The display mode of the third hold icon is a display mode different from the display mode of the fourth hold icon,
The display mode of the second hold icon is a display mode similar to the display mode of the fourth hold icon.
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100, the hold icon can be displayed in more various forms, and the interest of the game can be improved. In addition, according to the pachinko machine 100, there is a case where the third hold icon corresponding to the operation hold ball to be prefetched can be emphasized. Further, according to the pachinko machine 100, apart from the hold icon corresponding to the hold to be pre-reading notice, while maintaining a certain sense of unity, by displaying a plurality of hold icons with different aspects, In some cases, the player's expectation on the hold can be changed without changing the mode of the hold icon corresponding to the hold that is subject to the pre-reading notice. Further, according to the pachinko machine 100, there may be a case where the player's expectation for the hold icon corresponding to the hold that is not subject to the pre-reading notice can be sharpened.

(5) The pachinko machine 100,
A plurality of symbol display means (hereinafter referred to as "plurality of symbol display means");
A plurality of the hold display means (hereinafter referred to as "plural hold display means"),
At least one of the plurality of symbol display means is first symbol display means (for example, special figure 1 display device 212),
At least one of the plurality of symbol display means is second symbol display means (for example, special figure 2 display device 214),
At least one of the plurality of hold display means is a first hold display means (for example, the special figure 1 hold icon display area 910 of the decorative symbol display device 208),
At least one of the plurality of hold display means is a second hold display means (for example, the special figure 2 hold icon display area 920 of the decorative symbol display device 208),
The first symbol display means is capable of executing at least a first symbol variation display (for example, a symbol variation game of special figure 1 (special figure 1 variable game)),
The second symbol display means is capable of executing at least a second symbol variation display (for example, the symbol variation game of special figure 2 (special figure 2 variable game)),
The first hold display means is capable of at least executing a display indicating the number of operation hold balls that will operate the first symbol display means by the hold icon,
The second hold display means is capable of executing at least a display indicating the number of the operation hold balls that are to operate the second symbol display means by the hold icon,
The second control means is capable of at least executing a control for displaying the third hold icon on the first hold display means as the prefetch notice,
The second control means can execute at least the fifth control when the fifth condition is satisfied,
The fifth condition is satisfied when the first hold icon is displayed on the first hold display means and the third hold icon is displayed on the first hold display means. Is a condition that
The fifth control is a control for displaying at least the second hold icon on the first hold display means instead of the first hold icon displayed on the first hold display means,
The second control means does not change the hold icon displayed on the second hold display means even when the third hold icon is displayed on the first hold display means. Control is at least possible,
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100, the player may be able to easily specify the hold icon corresponding to the hold that is the target of the prefetch notice. Further, according to the pachinko machine 100, the anxiety given to the player is reduced by displaying the hold icon corresponding to the hold that may change the order of the change start in a manner unrelated to the pre-reading notice. There are cases where it is possible.

(6) The pachinko machine 100,
The holding display means sets the number of operation holding balls that will operate the first symbol display means and / or the number of operation holding balls that will operate the second symbol display means at a plurality of locations (for example, , The first hold icon display area 903, the second hold icon display area 940),
The second control means is capable of executing a control to display at least the third hold icon on one of the plurality of places when the first condition is satisfied,
The second control means is configured to display at least the first hold icon without displaying the third hold icon at the other of the plurality of places when the first condition is satisfied. Is something that can be performed,
It is characterized by that.

  According to the pachinko machine 100, there may be a case where it is possible to prevent the misrecognition of the number of operation holding balls (the number of holdings) caused by changing the mode of the holding icon.

In addition, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment may display a plurality of hold icons in various manners using the decorative symbol display device 208. For example, when there are two or more special holding balls (the number of holdings of the special figure variable game) and at least two holding icons are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, the pachinko machine 100 The hold icon may be displayed in a layer above the other hold icon so that a part of one of the two hold icons overlaps a part of the other hold icon. In this case, the entire hold icon is visible, and the other hold icon that overlaps the hold icon is not visible, that is, the entire hold icon is not visible. It is possible. In this way, it is possible to make one entire holding icon visible and make a part of the other holding icon invisible. In this case, the display size of one hold icon and the display size of the other hold icon may be the same or different. For example, the display size of one hold icon may be smaller or larger than the display size of the other hold icon.
In the pachinko machine 100, when the hold display unit displays at least two hold icons, a part of one hold icon of the two hold icons is overlapped with a part of the other hold icon. It is characterized by being displayed.
In the pachinko machine 100, the on-hold display means displays the entire one on-hold icon in a visible manner, and displays the other on-hold icon in a portion overlapping the one on-hold icon in an invisible manner. It is characterized by doing.

In addition, the pachinko machine 100 displays one of the two hold icons on a layer above the other hold icon so that the one hold icon overlaps the other hold icon. The entire icon may be made visible and the other held icon may be made invisible. In this case, the display size of one hold icon and the display size of the other hold icon may be the same so that one hold icon completely overlaps the other hold icon. Alternatively, the display size of one hold icon may be larger than the display size of the other hold icon so that the other hold icon fits in one hold icon.
In the pachinko machine 100, when the hold display unit displays at least two hold icons, one of the two hold icons is overlaid on the other hold icon. It is characterized by doing.
The pachinko machine 100 is characterized in that the hold display means displays the whole of the one hold icon so as to be visible and displays the whole of the other hold icon so as not to be visible.
In the pachinko machine 100, the display size of the one hold icon is the same as the display size of the other hold icon.
In the pachinko machine 100, the display size of the one hold icon is larger than the display size of the other hold icon.

Also, the pachinko machine 100 displays one of the two hold icons on a layer above the other hold icon so that the entire one hold icon is overlaid on the other hold icon. The entire hold icon may be visible, and the other hold icon that overlaps the hold icon may not be visible. In this case, the display size of one hold icon is smaller than the display size of the other hold icon. In addition, one hold icon is displayed so as to fit within the other hold icon.
In the pachinko machine 100, when the at least two on-hold icons are displayed, the on-hold display unit displays one of the two on-hold icons superimposed on the other on-hold icon. It is characterized by that.
In the pachinko machine 100, the display size of the one hold icon is smaller than the display size of the other hold icon.

  Also, the display form of one hold icon and the other hold icon may be the same graphic or different graphic. For example, the display mode of one hold icon and the display mode of the other hold icon may be circular. Moreover, the display mode of one hold icon may be circular, and the display mode of the other hold icon may be square. Moreover, the display mode of one hold icon may be a square, and the display mode of the other hold icon may be a circle. Also, the display mode of one hold icon and the display mode of the other hold icon may be the same color or different colors. Moreover, the display mode of one hold icon and the display mode of the other hold icon may be, for example, the character shown in FIG. In this case, the display mode of one hold icon and the display mode of the other hold icon may be the same character or different characters. Moreover, the display mode of one hold icon may be a character, and the display mode of the other hold icon may be a figure such as a circle or a rectangle. In addition, the display mode of one hold icon may be a figure such as a circle or a rectangle, and the display mode of the other hold icon may be a character.

  The various embodiments described above can be implemented in combination with each other.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, when changing the mode of a plurality of hold icons corresponding to the hold of the pre-reading notice non-target, the reliability increases stepwise toward the hold order of the hold of the pre-reading notice target. The display mode may be changed as described above.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the display mode of the hold icon corresponding to the pre-reading notice non-target hold is changed only when the display mode of the hold icon corresponding to the pre-reading notice hold is changed and the pre-reading notice is started. Is changed to a mode different from the default display mode. The display mode of the hold icon corresponding to the hold of the pre-reading notice target is different from the display mode of the hold icon corresponding to the hold of the pre-reading notice target.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, even when the display mode of the hold icon corresponding to the hold of the prefetching notice target is changed, the display mode of the hold icon corresponding to the hold of the prefetching notice non-target is the default display form. It is not necessary to change from.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, when the display mode of the hold icon corresponding to the hold of the pre-reading notice target is changed as the pre-reading notice, the display mode of the hold icon corresponding to the hold of the pre-reading notice non-target is changed. The display mode of the hold icon corresponding to the hold that is not subject to the pre-reading notice may not be changed. In these cases, the jackpot reliability may be set differently, or the jackpot reliability is the same. It may be set as follows.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment does not need to change the display mode of at least one hold icon when changing the mode of a plurality of hold icons corresponding to the hold that is not subject to the pre-reading notice.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment changes the display mode of the hold icon corresponding to the hold of the prefetch notice target, and may restrict the execution of a new prefetch notice during the prefetch notice, or newly When the pre-reading notice is executed for the increased hold, the form of the hold icon related to the pre-read notice that has been executed first may be changed to the same form as the hold icon that is not subject to the pre-read notice, or a plurality of hold icons May be displayed in the display mode of the prefetch notice, and a plurality of prefetch notices may be executed simultaneously.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, when determining the display mode of the hold icon corresponding to the pre-reading notice target hold, the display mode of one or a plurality of hold icons corresponding to the pre-reading notice non-holding is determined in advance ( FIG. 17). The display mode of the hold icon corresponding to the pre-reading notice target hold and the display mode of the hold icon corresponding to the pre-read notice non-hold hold are determined collectively. The display mode of the hold icon corresponding to the pre-reading notice target hold and the display mode of the hold icon corresponding to the pre-reading notice non-holding are determined using a table provided for each remaining number of reservations.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment is a special figure 2 priority variation machine, and the priority side special figure is displayed when the display mode of the hold icon of the non-priority side special figure 1 is changed to the display mode of the prefetch notice. Even if the two-variable game is interrupted, the hold icon in FIG. If the result of determining whether or not the special figure 2 variable game is interrupted is a big hit, the hold icon of the special figure 1 is changed to a display form different from the display form of the prefetch notice, and the prefetch notice is stopped.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, when reach production is started in a change prior to the change subject to the pre-reading notice regardless of whether or not the display mode of the hold icon is changed, There is a case.

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, the display mode of the hold icon corresponding to the hold that is not subject to the pre-reading notice when the pre-reading notice is executed is changed only in a specific period (for example, during a short period of time, during the electric support, during the probability change, etc.). The

  In the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, a plurality of modes may be provided as the default display mode of the hold icon.

  In the present embodiment, the hold icon has been described as an image displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, but the hold icon is not limited to the image. For example, the special figure 1 and special figure 2 holding lamps 218 and 220 may be used as holding icons. The hold icon includes an image, a lamp, and the like that indicate the number of operation hold balls in the special figure change display (the number of hold of the special figure change game).

[Second Embodiment]
Next, a game table according to the second embodiment of the present invention will be described. About the structure of the pachinko machine 100 by this Embodiment, since it is the same as that of the pachinko machine 100 by 1st Embodiment, description is abbreviate | omitted.

  33 and 34 are flowcharts showing an example of the flow of icon display control processing executed by the first sub-control unit 400 in the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment. Here, the icon may include both a hold icon and a variable icon, and may include only a hold icon. In step S2001 of the icon display control process in the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not a command including new prefetch result information (for example, a prefetch result information command including newly increased pending prefetch result information) is received. . In this example, basically, every time a special figure 1 starting port 230 or special figure 2 starting port 232 is won, a prefetch result information command is transmitted from the main control unit 300 to the first sub control unit 400. . If it is determined that a command including new prefetch result information has been received, the process proceeds to step S2003. Otherwise, the process proceeds to step S2013.

  In step S2003, it is determined whether there is an icon whose mode is being changed, that is, whether control for changing the icon display mode is being executed. If it is determined that there is no icon whose aspect is being changed, the process proceeds to step S2005. If it is determined that there is an icon whose aspect is being changed, the process proceeds to step S2011.

  In step S2005, it is determined whether the icon mode change condition is satisfied. The icon mode change condition includes, for example, winning a predetermined random number lottery performed by the first sub-control unit 400. If it is determined that the icon state change condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S2007. If it is determined that the icon state change condition is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S2011.

  In step S2007, an icon change scenario lottery process is performed. In the icon change scenario lottery process, for example, by using a random lottery with reference to the already described icon display mode lottery table, the notice non-target icon display mode lottery table, etc., the notice target icon (for example, the hold on which the icon mode change condition is established) Icon) display mode change scenario, a display mode change scenario of the non-notice icon, and the like are determined.

  In step S2009 following step S2007, information related to the lottery result in the icon change scenario lottery process (for example, the scenario number of the display mode change scenario of the notice target icon, the pattern number of the display mode change scenario of the non notice target icon), and the like. The data is stored in a scenario storage area provided in the RAM 408. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2013.

  In step S2011, the display mode of the icon corresponding to the increased hold is set as a default, and the information is stored in a predetermined area in the RAM 408. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2013.

  In step S2013, an icon attached image lottery process is performed. In the icon-attached image lottery process, the type, display mode (name), display presence / absence, and the like of the icon-attached image are determined by random lottery using a table (see FIG. 35) described later. The icon-attached image is an image displayed along with the icon image (icon body image), and basically constitutes one icon together with the icon image. Some or all of the icon-attached images may be displayed overlapping with some or all of the icon images (for example, icon images corresponding to the icon-attached images or icon images not corresponding to the icon-attached images). is there. In addition, the icon-attached image may be displayed on a layer (front) that is higher than the icon image, or may be displayed on a layer (back) that is lower than the icon image. The information on the icon attached image determined in step S2013 is stored in a predetermined area in the RAM 408.

  In step S2015 subsequent to step S2013, a hold icon corresponding to the increased hold is displayed in a predetermined area (for example, hold) in the display mode based on the display mode change scenario determined in step S2007 or the default display mode determined in S2011. The display processing is performed in the first to fourth areas of the icon display area 900 (area corresponding to the hold order of the hold).

  In step S2017 following step S2015, it is determined whether or not an icon attached image display condition is satisfied. The icon attached image display condition includes, for example, that the icon attached image is determined to be displayed in the icon attached image lottery process in step S2013 (the icon attached image to be displayed is determined). . If it is determined that the icon attached image display condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S2019. If it is determined that the icon attached image display condition is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S2021.

  In step S2019, based on the information of the icon attached image determined in step S2013, a process of displaying a predetermined icon attached image in accordance with the corresponding hold icon is performed. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2021.

  In step S2021, it is determined whether or not the number of reserved memory for special figure variable games has decreased. The determination as to whether or not the number of reserved memories has decreased is made based on, for example, a symbol variation start command or a prefetch result information command from the main control unit 300. If it is determined that the number of reserved memories has decreased, the process proceeds to step S2023. If it is determined that the number of reserved memories has not decreased, the process proceeds to step S2025.

  In step S2023, a hold icon display position change process is performed. In the hold icon display position change process, a process for changing the display position of each hold icon in accordance with a decrease in the number of hold memories (for example, a process for setting an animation for moving the display position of the hold icon in the hold icon display area, Including a process of setting an animation to move the held icon in the icon display area to the variable icon display area as a variable icon). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2025.

  In step S2025, it is determined whether an icon change condition is satisfied. Examples of icon change conditions include that a special symbol variation game has been started (a symbol variation start command has been received from the main control unit 300), that a predetermined timing has been reached, and that the winning symbol has been stopped. There is that. If it is determined that the icon change condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S2027. If it is determined that the icon change condition is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S2029.

  In step S2027, based on information such as a scenario number and a pattern number stored in the scenario storage area of the RAM 408, a process for changing the display mode of an icon (for example, a notification target icon or a notification non-target icon) (for example, the icon number) Including a process of setting an animation for changing the display mode). Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2029.

  In step S2029, it is determined whether an icon display end condition is satisfied. As the icon display end condition, for example, in the case of a hold icon, a predetermined time has elapsed since the start of the special figure variable game corresponding to the hold icon and the start of the special figure variable game corresponding to the hold icon. In the case of a variation icon, the special figure variation game corresponding to the variation icon has been completed. If it is determined that the icon display end condition is satisfied, the process proceeds to step S2031, and if it is determined that the icon display end condition is not satisfied, the process proceeds to step S2033.

  In step S2031, a process for terminating the display of the corresponding icon (an icon that satisfies the icon display end condition) (including a process for setting an animation for deleting the icon) is performed. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S2033.

  In step S2033, other icon display control processes (for example, a process of temporarily erasing a held icon or the like in accordance with super reach) are performed. Thereafter, the icon display control process is terminated and the process returns to the effect control process.

  In this example, the icon display mode change scenario is determined only at the timing at which a command including new prefetch result information is received (the timing at which an affirmative determination is made in step S2001), but is limited to this timing. For example, the display mode change scenario may be determined in the middle of the hold icon that is already displayed in the default mode, or another mode in which the hold icon that is already displayed in the default mode is set in the middle. You may change to

  Further, in this example, when there is an icon whose display mode is being changed (when a negative determination is made in step S2003), the display mode change scenario for the increased hold (hold corresponding to the new prefetch result information) is determined. Although it is regulated and the display mode of the hold is set as a default, the determination of the display mode change scenario is not limited to this time. For example, when there is a big hit hold before the increased hold, the determination of the display mode change scenario for the increased hold may be regulated.

  FIG. 35 shows an example of a table used in the icon attached image lottery process (step S2013) of the icon display control process. In the icon-attached image lottery process of this example, first, a lottery for determining the type of the icon-attached image (“plate system” or “effect system”) is performed, and then the determined icon-attached image type information and Information on the display mode of the icon image (icon body image) (for example, the display mode of “winning”, the display mode of “at the start of variation (the variation)”, etc.), and a predetermined production random number (the possible range is 0 to 99), and a lottery for determining a display mode (including no display) of the icon attached image with reference to the table shown in FIG. Here, the numerical values in the table shown in FIG. 35 represent the width of the distribution numerical value range of the random numbers for performance.

  As shown in FIG. 35, the type of icon-attached image that can be selected differs depending on the type of icon image (“ball system” or “character system”) previously determined in step S2007 or S2011. When the type of the icon image is a sphere system (display mode “white”, “blue”, “green”, “red”, “family crest”), the icon attached image that can be selected is only a plate system, and the icon image In the case of the character type (display mode “Yoshimune”, “Princess”, “」 ”), the icon attached image that can be selected is only the effect type. In other words, the plate icon image can overlap the sphere icon image and cannot display the character icon image, and the effect icon image cannot overlap the sphere icon image. Overlapping display with the system icon image is possible.

  In this example, there are five types of plate-type icon-attached image display modes: “reach”, “chance”, “heat”, “hot”, and “large board behavior”. There are five types: “Aura [white]”, “Aura [blue]”, “Aura [green]”, “Aura [red]”, and “Aura [rainbow]”.

  For example, when the plate type is selected as the type of the icon attached image and the display mode of the icon image is “white” (sphere type), the icon attached image is selected as “no display” with a probability of 90%, and 5% “Reach” is selected with a probability of “5” and “Chance” is selected with a probability of 5%. Further, when the plate type is selected as the type of the icon attached image and the display mode of the icon image is “red” (sphere type), the icon attached image is selected as “no display” with a probability of 25%, and 15%. “Reach” is selected with a probability of “30”, “Chance” is selected with a probability of 30%, “Heat” is selected with a probability of 20%, and “Intense fever” is selected with a probability of 10%. As described above, among the plate-type icon-attached images, a display mode with a high expectation such as “heat” or “extreme heat” is more easily selected as the reliability of the display mode of the icon image is higher. However, if the display mode of the icon image is the jackpot confirmed “family crest” (reliability 100%), no icon-attached image is selected (no display is selected with a probability of 100%).

  Also, in this example, “large board behavior” in the plate-type icon attached images and “aura [rainbow]” in the effect-type icon attached images are display forms for determining the big hit, and therefore the table of FIG. Is selected by an exception process different from the lottery process using.

  The icon-attached image display mode “large board behavior” is an exception process only when the icon image display mode is “red” and timer group 3, 5 or 7 (a timer group that is a big hit) is set. Are selected with a predetermined probability (indicated by “*” in FIG. 35). Even if the display mode of the icon image is “red”, if the timer group 1, 2, 4 or 6 (the timer group to be disconnected) is set, the display mode “large board behavior” is not selected, By the lottery process using the table of FIG. 35, any one of “No display”, “Reach”, “Chance”, “Heat”, and “Intense heat” is selected. Even if the display mode of the icon image is “red” and the timer group 3, 5 or 7 is set, when the lottery by exception processing is not won, the table of FIG. 35 is used. One of “no display”, “reach”, “chance”, “heat”, and “extreme heat” may be selected by the lottery process.

  The icon-attached image display mode “Aura [rainbow]” is displayed by exception processing only when the icon image display mode is “Yoshimune” or “Princess” and timer group 3, 5 or 7 is set. It is selected with a predetermined probability (indicated by “*” in FIG. 35). Even if the display mode of the icon image is “Yoshimune”, if timer group 1, 2, 4 or 6 is set, the display mode “Aura [rainbow]” is not selected, and the table of FIG. Depending on the lottery process used, no display, “Aura [green]”, or “Aura [red]” is selected. In addition, even if the display mode of the icon image is “Princess”, if timer group 1, 2, 4 or 6 is set, the display mode “Aura [rainbow]” is not selected, and FIG. Either no display or “Aura [red]” is selected by the lottery process using the table. Even if the display mode of the icon image is “Yoshimune” or “Princess” and the timer group 3, 5 or 7 is set, if the lottery by exception processing is not won, Either no display, “Aura [green]”, or “Aura [red]” may be selected by a lottery process using a table.

  The icon-attached image is displayed, for example, from the start of the display of the corresponding icon image until the change corresponding to the icon image is started and a predetermined time elapses. The display mode of the icon attached image may be changed at a timing such as the start of fluctuation based on a predetermined change scenario as in the case of the icon image described above.

  In this example, the display mode of the icon image and the display mode of the icon-attached image are determined by separate lottery. For example, the display mode and change scenario of the icon image, the display mode and change scenario of the icon-attached image, etc. May be determined in one lottery. That is, independent control as in this example may be performed for a plurality of images that may be displayed overlapping each other, or common control (for example, icon image display mode, change scenario, and icon attachment) A common scenario including an image display mode and a change scenario may be determined by one lottery).

  Further, the big hit reliability may be designed differently depending on whether or not the icon attached image is displayed and the display mode. For example, the hold icon of the display mode “red” when the icon-attached image is displayed has a higher jackpot reliability than the hold icon of the display mode “red” when the icon-attached image is not displayed. Like that. Also, the display mode “red” when the icon-attached image of the display mode “extreme heat” is displayed rather than the hold icon of the display mode “red” when the icon-attached image of the display mode “reach” is displayed. "Holding icon" is set to have a higher hit reliability. This is because the table as shown in FIG. 35 is prepared separately when timer group 1, 2, 4 or 6 is set and when timer group 3, 5 or 7 is set. This can be realized by differentiating the distribution of the random numbers for presentation on the table.

  Next, in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment, a specific example of effects executed by the decorative symbol display device 208 or the like under the control of the first sub control unit 400 or the second sub control unit 500 will be described.

(Example 2-1)
FIG. 36 and FIG. 37 show examples of effects in Example 2-1 of the present embodiment. FIG. 36 (a) shows a state during a variable period of a certain special figure 1 variable game. As shown in FIG. 36 (a), the special figure 1 display device 212 performs the fluctuation display of the special figure 1. FIG. The special figure 1 holding lamp 218 has the number of holdings of the special figure 1 (the number of operation holding balls that will activate the special figure 1 display device 212) by turning on the first to second LEDs from the left. Is displayed. The special figure 2 holding lamp 220 displays that the number of holdings in the special figure 2 is 0 by turning off all the LEDs.

  In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In the variation icon display area 800, a variation icon 801 (display mode: white) corresponding to the special figure 1 variation game is displayed. In the first area and the second area of the hold icon display area 900, a hold icon 901 (display mode: white) and a hold icon 902 (display mode: white) are displayed, respectively. The hold icon display area 900 displays two hold icons 901 and 902 to notify that the hold number in FIG. 1 is two.

  FIG. 36 (b) shows a state in which the holding of the special figure 1 is increased by one during the special figure 1 variable game. As shown in FIG. 36B, the special figure 1 hold lamp 218 indicates that the number of hold in the special figure 1 has increased from 2 to 3 by turning on the third LED from the left. A new hold icon 903 is displayed in the third area of the hold icon display area 900. A hold icon 903 is a hold icon subject to pre-reading notice (a hold icon for which an icon mode change condition has been established), and a change scenario of an icon image (icon main body image) corresponding to the hold icon 903 is determined by a lottery based on the “at the time of winning” : Blue, After 1 change: Blue, After 2 change: Green, Start of change: Green ”. In this example, it is assumed that two icon-attached image change scenarios corresponding to the hold icon 903 are determined by lottery. For example, the scenario for changing the first icon-attached image is a plate-type “when winning: no display, after 1 change: reach, after 2 change: reach, start of change: reach”. The change scenario is “Prize: No display, 1 change: No display, 2 change: Chance, Change start: Chance” for the plate system. Based on these change scenarios, at the time shown in FIG. 36B, the icon attached image corresponding to the hold icon 903 is not displayed, and the hold icon 903 is configured only by the icon image of the display mode “blue”. Yes. Here, the icon-attached image in this example is written with a predetermined character string (for example, the name of the icon-attached image (in this example, one of reach, chance, heat, intense heat, large board behavior)), a symbol, or the like. It is an oblong plate-shaped opaque plate image.

  FIG. 36 (c) shows a state where the special figure 1 variable game is completed. As shown in FIG. 36 (c), the special figure E (displacement) is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212, and the symbol combination “decoration” other than the symbol combination for notifying the winning is displayed in the symbol display areas 208 a to 208 c. “2-decoration 3-decoration 0” is stopped.

  FIG. 36 (d) shows a state in which the next special figure 1 variable game is started. As shown in FIG. 36 (d), the special figure 1 display device 212 starts the fluctuation display of the special figure 1. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 indicates that the number of hold in the special figure 1 has decreased from 3 to 2 by turning off the third LED from the left.

  In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the decorative symbol variation display is started. The variation icon 801 displayed in the variation icon display area 800 is erased, for example, after the previous special figure 1 variable game is completed and before the current special figure 1 variable game is started. When the variation icon is erased, it may be accompanied by a predetermined erasure animation (for example, an animation in which the transparency (transparency) of the variation icon gradually increases and is eventually erased). The mode of the animation of erasing the variable icon may be different between the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, or may be different based on the lottery result or the prefetch result.

  The hold icon 901 displayed in the first area of the hold icon display area 900 becomes a change icon 802 and moves to the change icon display area 800. When the change icon moves from the hold icon display area 900 to the change icon display area 800, a predetermined movement animation (for example, the hold icon in the hold icon display area 900 becomes a change icon, and the display size is gradually enlarged. However, it may be accompanied by an animation that moves to the fluctuation icon display area 800. The hold icons 902 and 903 displayed in the second area and the third area of the hold icon display area 900 have moved to the first area and the second area, respectively. When the hold icon moves, a predetermined movement animation may be accompanied. The movement animation mode of the fluctuation icon and the hold icon may be different between the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, or may be different based on the prefetching result or the like.

  FIG. 36 (d ′) shows the enlarged hold icon 903 in FIG. 36 (d). As shown in FIG. 36 (d ′), the plate image 903b (display mode: reach) overlapped with the icon image 903a (display mode: blue) according to the change scenario of the first icon-attached image corresponding to the hold icon 903. Newly displayed. When a plate image is newly displayed, a predetermined animation may be accompanied. The hold icon 903 shown in FIGS. 36D and 36D includes an icon image 903a and a plate image 903b. The plate image 903b is displayed in a layer in front of the icon image 903a (displayed with priority over the icon image 903a). Further, the entire plate image 903b overlaps a part of the icon image 903a. Accordingly, the part of the icon image 903a is blocked by the plate image 903b and cannot be visually recognized. On the other hand, the entire plate image 903b is visible. In this example, the entire plate image 903b overlaps a part of the icon image 903a, but a part of the plate image 903b may not overlap the icon image 903a. That is, a part of the plate image 903b and a part of the icon image 903a may overlap, or a part of the plate image 903b and the whole icon image 903a may overlap. Further, the entire plate image 903b and the entire icon image 903a may overlap.

  FIG. 36 (e) shows a state where the special figure 1 variable game is completed. As shown in FIG. 36 (e), the special symbol E (displacement) is stopped and displayed on the special symbol 1 display device 212, and symbol combinations other than the symbol combination for notifying the winning are displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. “Decoration 6—Decoration 1—Decoration 8” is stopped.

  FIG. 36 (f) shows a state in which the next special figure 1 variable game is started. As shown in FIG. 36 (f), the special figure 1 display device 212 starts the fluctuation display of the special figure 1. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 indicates that the number of hold in the special figure 1 has decreased from 2 to 1 by turning off the second LED from the left.

  In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the decorative symbol variation display is started. The variation icon 802 displayed in the variation icon display area 800 is erased, for example, after the previous special figure 1 variable game is ended and before the current special figure 1 variable game is started. When the change icon is deleted, a predetermined deletion animation may be accompanied. The hold icon 902 displayed in the first area of the hold icon display area 900 becomes a change icon 803 and moves to the change icon display area 800. The hold icon 903 displayed in the second area of the hold icon display area 900 has moved to the first area.

  FIG. 36 (f ′) shows the enlarged hold icon 903 in FIG. 36 (f). As shown in FIG. 36 (f '), the display mode of the icon image 903a is changed from blue to green according to the icon image change scenario corresponding to the hold icon 903. Further, according to the second icon attached image change scenario corresponding to the hold icon 903, a plate image 903c (display mode: chance) overlapping the icon image 903a is newly displayed above the plate image 903b. When the plate image 903c is displayed, the display position of the plate image 903b may be moved (in this example, the display position of the plate image 903b is moved downward in order to secure a display space for the plate image 903c. Moved).

  The hold icon 903 shown in FIGS. 36F and 36F includes an icon image 903a and plate images 903b and 903c. The plate images 903b and 903c are displayed in a layer in front of the icon image 903a. Further, the entire plate images 903b and 903c overlap a part of the icon image 903a. Accordingly, the part of the icon image 903a is blocked by the plate images 903b and 903c and cannot be visually recognized. On the other hand, the entire plate images 903b and 903c are visible. As described above, a plurality of plate images 903b and 903c may overlap with one icon image 903a.

  In FIG. 37 (a), the special figure 1 variable game of FIG. 36 (f) is completed and the next special figure 1 variable game is started, and reach (super reach B in this example) is performed in the special figure 1 variable game. It shows the state that occurred. As shown in FIG. 37 (a), the special figure 1 display device 212 performs the fluctuation display of the special figure 1. The special figure 1 holding lamp 218 indicates that the number of holdings in the special figure 1 has decreased from 1 to 0 by turning off the leftmost LED.

  The variation icon 803 displayed in the variation icon display area 800 is erased, for example, after the previous special figure 1 variable game is ended and before the current special figure 1 variable game is started. The hold icon 903 displayed in the first area of the hold icon display area 900 becomes a change icon 804 and moves to the change icon display area 800. In each of the symbol display areas 208a and 208c, “decoration 8” is displayed, and the variable display is continued only in the symbol display area 208b.

  FIG. 37 (a ′) shows the fluctuation icon 804 in FIG. 37 (a) in an enlarged manner. As shown in FIG. 37 (a ′), the fluctuation icon 804 has a configuration similar to the hold icon 903 except that the display size is larger than the hold icon. However, the plate image of the display mode “reach” (the plate image corresponding to the plate image 903b of the hold icon 903) is deleted based on the occurrence of the reach in the special figure 1 variable game. That is, the variation icon 804 shown in FIGS. 37A and 37A includes an icon image 804a and a plate image 804c, and a part of the icon image 804a is blocked by the plate image 804c and cannot be visually recognized. Yes. When the plate image of the display mode “reach” is erased, the portion of the icon image 804a that is shielded by the plate image becomes visible.

  FIG. 37 (b) shows a state in which a special effect for Super Reach B is started in the special figure 1 variable game (in this example, a swordsman confrontation effect in which a Yoshimune character and a swordsman character confront each other with a sword). . As shown in FIG. 37 (b), when the special effect for Super Reach B is started, the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is switched from the normal screen background to the special screen background. Also, the fluctuation icon display area 800, the hold icon display area 900, the change icon, the hold icon, etc. are hidden, and the symbol display areas 208a to 208c are reduced and moved to the upper right corner of the screen.

  FIG. 37 (c) shows a state in which the special effect for Super Reach B has been completed in the special figure 1 variable game. As shown in FIG. 37 (c), when the special effect for Super Reach B is finished, the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 returns from the special screen background to the normal screen background. When returning to the normal screen background, the symbol display areas 208a to 208c are enlarged and returned to their original positions. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the symbol combination “decoration 8-decoration 9-decoration 8” other than the symbol combination for notifying the hit is temporarily stopped, and the fluctuation of the temporarily stopped symbol combination is changed. Further, the display of the fluctuation icon display area 800, the hold icon display area 900, the change icon, the hold icon, etc. is resumed. In this example, the display of the fluctuation icon 804 is resumed in a state where the plate image 804c is erased. That is, the variation icon 804 shown in FIG. 37 (c) is composed of only the icon image 804a.

  FIG. 38 (d) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. As shown in FIG. 38 (d), the special figure E (displacement) is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212, and in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the fluctuation fluctuation is finished and the symbol combination “decoration 8-decoration” is displayed. “9-decoration 8” is stopped. The change icon 804 is deleted with a predetermined deletion animation, for example, after the symbol is stopped and displayed.

  In this embodiment, by displaying the plate image (icon attached image) as the second prefetching notice in front of the icon image as the first prefetching notice, it is emphasized that the hold is the object of the prefetching notice. Is done. For this reason, it may be possible to reliably prevent overlook and misunderstanding of the pre-reading notice.

  The pre-reading notice by the icon image allows the player to grasp the notice contents even if other images are superimposed on the front if the display mode (for example, color, pattern, shape, etc.) of the icon image can be identified. be able to. However, the pre-reading notice by the plate image makes it difficult for the player to grasp the notice contents if the characters written on the plate image are hidden by other images. In addition, when some characters are hidden, they may be recognized as other characters, which may mislead the notice content. In the present embodiment, there is a case where a misrecognition of the notice content can be prevented by displaying a plate image with characters and symbols in front of the icon image.

  That is, according to the present embodiment, a first image that can identify the jackpot reliability even when a part of the image cannot be visually recognized (for example, an image that notifies the jackpot reliability by color, shape, etc. (in this example, an icon image) )) Is concealed by a second image (for example, an image (in this example, a plate image) in which the big hit reliability is notified by letters, symbols, etc.) that makes it difficult to identify the big hit reliability when a part cannot be visually recognized. In some cases, the player may be able to grasp the jackpot reliability while attracting attention.

(Example 2-2)
FIG. 38 shows an example of effects in Example 2-2 of this embodiment. FIG. 38A shows a state during a variation period of a certain special figure 1 variable game. As shown in FIG. 38 (a), the special figure 1 display device 212 performs the fluctuation display of the special figure 1. The special figure 1 holding lamp 218 indicates that the number of holdings in the special figure 1 is 2 by turning on the first and second LEDs from the left. The special figure 2 holding lamp 220 displays that the number of holdings in the special figure 2 is 0 by turning off all the LEDs.

  In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In the first area and the second area of the hold icon display area 900, a hold icon 901 (display mode: white) and a hold icon 902 (display mode: white) are displayed, respectively. The hold icon display area 900 notifies that the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 2 by displaying two hold icons 901 and 902. These hold icons 901 and 902 are not subject to prefetching notice. In this example, the variation icon display area and the variation icon are not displayed.

  In the lower part of the hold icon display area 900, one horizontally long rectangular pedestal image 909 extending from the first area to the fourth area is displayed. The display mode of the pedestal image 909 is default (in this example, white without a pattern). A part of the pedestal image 909 is displayed so as to overlap a part of the hold icon 901, and another part of the pedestal image 909 is displayed so as to overlap a part of the hold icon 902. Since the hold icons 901 and 902 are displayed preferentially over the pedestal image 909, they are displayed in a layer in front of the pedestal image 909. Accordingly, a part of the pedestal image 909 is blocked by the hold icon 901 and cannot be viewed, and another part of the pedestal image 909 is blocked by the hold icon 902 and cannot be viewed. In this example, the pedestal image 909 is displayed regardless of the number of holds (the number of hold icons).

  FIG. 38 (b) shows a state in which the number of suspensions of special figure 1 is increased by two during the special figure 1 variable game. As shown in FIG. 38 (b), the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 indicates that the number of holdings in the special figure 1 has increased from 2 to 4 by turning on the third to fourth LEDs from the left. . A new hold icon 903 (display mode: red) and a hold icon 904 (display mode: white) are displayed in the third area and the fourth area of the hold icon display area 900. It is assumed that the hold icon 903 is a target of prefetching notice, and the hold icon 904 is not a target of prefetching notice.

  A part of each of the hold icons 903 and 904 is displayed so as to overlap with a part of the pedestal image 909 in the same manner as the hold icons 901 and 902. Since the hold icons 903 and 904 are also displayed on the layer in front of the pedestal image 909 in the same manner as the hold icons 901 and 902, a part of the pedestal image 909 is also blocked by the hold icons 903 and 904 and cannot be visually recognized. Yes. As described above, the hold icon 903 subject to the pre-reading notice and the hold icons 901, 902, and 904 that are not the pre-fetch notice object are all displayed so as to overlap the pedestal image 909. Further, the hold icon 903 for the pre-reading notice object, the holding icons 901 and 902 corresponding to the holding increased before the pre-reading notice object, and the hold icon 904 corresponding to the holding increased after the pre-reading notice object are all pedestals. The image 909 is displayed in front of it.

  Further, the display mode of the pedestal image 909 is changed from the default to a predetermined pattern based on the execution of the prefetch notice (in this example, the display of the hold icon 903 subject to the prefetch notice). By changing the display mode of the base image 909, it is notified that the pre-reading notice is being executed. However, this notification is not a notification that specifies the hold for the pre-read notice.

  FIG. 38 (c) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game subject to the pre-reading notice is started (the state after three fluctuations in FIG. 38 (b)). As shown in FIG. 38 (c), the special figure 1 display device 212 displays the fluctuation of special figure 1. The special figure 1 holding lamp 218 indicates that the holding number of the special figure 1 is one.

  In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. A hold icon 904 (display mode: white) is displayed in the first area of the hold icon display area 900. The pedestal image 909 is continuously displayed in a form with a predetermined pattern. In this example, since the execution of the prefetch notice is notified by an image other than the hold icon, it can be seen that the change is the target of the prefetch notice even after the change that is the subject of the prefetch notice has started. It is easy.

  FIG. 38D shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game subject to the pre-reading notice is finished. As shown in FIG. 38 (d), the special figure E (displacement) is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212, and the symbol combination “decoration” other than the symbol combination for notifying the winning is displayed in the symbol display areas 208 a to 208 c. “8-decoration 9-decoration 8” is stopped. Based on the end of the change of the pre-reading notice target, the display mode of the pedestal image 909 is returned from the predetermined pattern to the default.

  In the present embodiment, the first image (for example, the pedestal image 909) that informs that the prefetching notice is being executed is hidden by the holding icon that is not the prefetching notice target, thereby displaying the hold icon that is the target of the prefetching notice. It is possible to make it difficult to visually recognize at least a part of the display area of an image (for example, the pedestal image 909) relating to the pre-reading notice. Thereby, while holding icons that are subject to pre-reading notice are most conspicuous, other holding icons that are not subject to pre-reading notice may be noticeable.

  Here, in this embodiment, a plurality of images (for example, hold icons 901 to 904) are displayed in front of one image (for example, pedestal image 909), but one image (for example, pedestal image) 909) may be displayed so as to overlap a plurality of images (for example, the hold icons 901 to 904). In this case, some of the plurality of images are blocked by one image and cannot be visually recognized.

(Example 2-3)
FIG. 39 shows an example of effects in Example 2-3 of the present embodiment. FIG. 39 (a) shows a state during a variable period of a certain special figure 1 variable game. As shown in FIG. 39 (a), the special figure 1 display device 212 performs the fluctuation display of the special figure 1. The special figure 1 holding lamp 218 indicates that the number of holdings in the special figure 1 is 2 by turning on the first and second LEDs from the left. The special figure 2 holding lamp 220 displays that the number of holdings in the special figure 2 is 0 by turning off all the LEDs.

  In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. A hold icon 901 and a hold icon 902 are displayed in the first area and the second area of the hold icon display area 900, respectively. The hold icon display area 900 notifies that the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 2 by displaying two hold icons 901 and 902. These hold icons 901 and 902 are not subject to prefetching notice. In this example, the variation icon display area and the variation icon are not displayed.

  The hold icon 901 includes a soldier image 901d representing a soldier facing the front, and a rectangular pedestal image 901e arranged at the foot of the soldier image 901d. A part of the soldier image 901d is displayed so as to overlap a part of the base image 901e. Since the soldier image 901d is displayed with priority over the pedestal image 901e, the soldier image 901d is displayed in a layer in front of the pedestal image 901e. Thereby, a part of the base image 901e is shielded by the soldier image 901d and cannot be visually recognized.

  Similar to the hold icon 901, the hold icon 902 includes a soldier image 902d and a base image 902e. The soldier image 902d is the same image as the soldier image 901d, and the pedestal image 902e is the same image as the pedestal image 901e. Similar to the hold icon 901, a part of the pedestal image 902e is blocked by the soldier image 902d and cannot be viewed.

  FIG. 39 (b) shows a state in which the hold of the special figure 1 is increased by one during the special figure 1 variable game. As shown in FIG. 39 (b), the special figure 1 hold lamp 218 indicates that the number of hold in the special figure 1 has increased from 2 to 3 by turning on the third LED from the left. A new hold icon 903 is displayed in the third area of the hold icon display area 900. It is assumed that the hold icon 903 is a prefetch notice target icon.

  The hold icon 903 includes an officer image 903d representing an officer facing the front, and a rectangular pedestal image 903e arranged at the foot of the officer image 903d. Since the officer has a higher class than the soldier, the hold icon 903 including the officer image 903d reports that the reliability is higher than the hold icons 901 and 902 including the soldier images 901d and 902d. The pedestal image 903e is the same image as the pedestal images 901e and 902e. As with the hold icons 901 and 902, a part of the pedestal image 903e is blocked by the officer image 903d and cannot be viewed. In the hold icon subject to the pre-reading notice, an officer image having a higher class may be used instead of the default soldier image, but the default image is used as the pedestal image.

  FIG. 39 (c) shows a state where the special figure 1 variable game is completed. As shown in FIG. 39 (c), the special figure E (displacement) is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212, and the symbol display areas 208a to 208c have symbol combinations “decorations other than the symbol combination for notifying the winning. “8-decoration 3-decoration 6” is stopped.

  FIGS. 39D to 39H show a state in which the next special figure 1 variable game is started. As shown in FIGS. 39D to 39H, the special figure 1 display device 212 starts the variable display of the special figure 1. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 indicates that the number of hold in the special figure 1 has decreased from 3 to 2 by turning off the third LED from the left.

  In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the decorative symbol variation display is started. In the hold icon display area 900, a reduction animation for reducing the number of hold icons from 3 to 2 is executed. The decrease animation of the hold icon includes an erase animation that deletes the hold icon in the first area of the hold icon display area 900 and a movement animation that moves the hold icons in the second area to the fourth area to the first area to the third area, respectively. It can be thought of as a combination. In this example, when the reduction animation is started, the number of pedestal images among the hold icons immediately decreases, and the number of soldier images and officer images gradually decreases.

  Specifically, when the reduction animation is started, the pedestal image 901e (part of the hold icon 901) displayed in the first area of the hold icon display area 900 is immediately deleted and displayed in the second area. The pedestal image 902e (part of the hold icon 902) and the pedestal image 903e (part of the hold icon 903) displayed in the third area immediately move to the first area and the second area, respectively. As a result, the number of pedestal images immediately decreases from 3 to 2 (see FIG. 39D). That is, the execution period of the reduction animation for the pedestal image is, for example, approximately 0 seconds.

  On the other hand, the soldier image 901d (a part of the hold icon 901), the soldier image 902d (a part of the hold icon 902), and the officer image 903d (a part of the hold icon 903) are turned to the left by the decreasing animation. After that, it is visually recognized as moving in the left direction of the screen. The soldier image 901d displayed in the first area is gradually moved out of the display area at the left end of the screen from the first area and is erased from the screen (see FIGS. 39D to 39H). The soldier image 902d displayed in the second area gradually moves from the second area to the first area, and then faces the front on the pedestal image 902e that has already moved to the first area (FIG. 39D). To (g)). The officer image 903d displayed in the third area gradually moves from the third area to the second area, and then faces the front on the pedestal image 903e already moved to the second area (FIG. 39D). To (g)). By these animations, the number of soldier images and officer images is reduced from 3 to 2, for example, over several seconds. That is, the execution period of the reduction animation for the soldier image and the officer image is, for example, about several seconds.

  Thus, since there is a difference between the timing when the number of pedestal images decreases and the timing when the number of soldier images and officer images decreases, images that do not correspond to each other (the target and Images with different hold) are displayed in duplicate. For example, at the time shown in FIG. 39 (d), the soldier image 901d (a part of the reserved icon 901 already digested) and the pedestal image 902e (a part of the held icon 902) are displayed overlappingly, and the soldier image 902d. (Part of the hold icon 902) and the pedestal image 903e (part of the hold icon 903) are displayed in an overlapping manner. The officer image 903d does not overlap with other images.

  At the time when the reduction animation is completed, the above-described shift is eliminated, and images corresponding to each other are displayed again and again. For example, at the time points shown in FIGS. 39 (g) and (h), the soldier image 902d and the pedestal image 902e are displayed in an overlapping manner, and the officer image 903d and the pedestal image 903e are displayed in an overlapping manner.

  According to the present embodiment, there are cases where it is possible to misrecognize the number of holds and promote the launch of a game ball by the player by displaying images that constitute different hold icons.

  In addition, when each hold icon is composed of a plurality of elements as in this embodiment, various displays can be performed even in the same combination by varying the animation start timing and execution period length for each element. It can be performed. In particular, in this example, there is a case where it is possible to prevent misrecognition of the number of holdings by immediately changing the number of pedestal images according to the decrease in holdings based on the start of fluctuation. In addition, for soldier images and officer images, it may be possible to more reliably prevent false recognition of the number of holds by carefully performing a reduction animation indicating that the number of holds has decreased.

  In this embodiment, the soldier image 901d is displayed as a fluctuation icon for a predetermined time to indicate that the fluctuation has started even after the corresponding hold has been consumed (FIGS. 39D to 39G). . On the other hand, the pedestal image 901e is not displayed as a variation icon because it is deleted when the corresponding hold is digested and the variation is started. That is, in this embodiment, a pedestal image that is not displayed as a variation icon may be hidden by a soldier image that may be displayed as a variation icon. Also, as shown in FIG. 39 (b), by changing the mode of one of a plurality of images constituting one hold icon, a function as a notice is given, and the mode of the other image is changed. You may make it prevent misrecognition of the number of pending | holdings by not changing. In the present embodiment, the image (the officer image 903d) whose mode is changed by the pre-reading notice is hidden by being displayed with priority over the image (the pedestal image 903e) whose form is not changed by the pre-reading notice. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and an image whose aspect is not changed by the notice may be hidden from an image whose form is changed by the notice.

(Example 2-4)
FIG. 40 shows an example of effects in Example 2-4 of the present embodiment. The decorative symbol display device 208 of the present embodiment is provided with a first hold icon display area 1900 and a second hold icon display area 2900 as hold icon display areas for displaying the number of hold of the special figure 1 variable game. . The first hold icon display area 1900 is arranged vertically along the right edge of the screen. The first hold icon display area 1900 can display a maximum of four hold icons, and is roughly divided into four areas: a first area, a second area, a third area, and a fourth area from the bottom to the top. ing. Similar to the hold icon display area 900 of the embodiment 2-1, the second hold icon display area 2900 is adjacent to the right side of the variable icon display area 800 and is disposed horizontally along the lower end of the screen.

  Both the first hold icon display area 1900 and the second hold icon display area 2900 can display the number of holds shown in FIG. 1 depending on the number of hold icons to be displayed. Usually, the number of hold icons displayed in the first hold icon display area 1900 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “first hold icon”) and the hold icons displayed in the second hold icon display area 2900 (hereinafter “ Of course, it is the same as the number of “second hold icons”. The display size of the first hold icon displayed in the first hold icon display area 1900 is relatively small, and the display size of the second hold icon displayed in the second hold icon display area 2900 is larger. Further, in the second hold icon display area 2900 of this example, the second hold icon can be displayed in a plurality of types of display modes, and whether or not the hold is made is notified (pre-reading notice) with a predetermined reliability according to the display mode. Is possible. On the other hand, in the first hold icon display area 1900 of this example, the first hold icon can be displayed only in one type of display mode (for example, a black circle), and a pre-reading notice can be made by the display mode of the first hold icon. Can not.

  FIG. 40A shows a state during a variation period of a certain special figure 1 variable game. As shown in FIG. 40 (a), the special figure 1 display device 212 performs the fluctuation display of the special figure 1. The special figure 1 holding lamp 218 indicates that the number of holdings in the special figure 1 is 2 by turning on the first and second LEDs from the left. The special figure 2 holding lamp 220 displays that the number of holdings in the special figure 2 is 0 by turning off all the LEDs.

  In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In the variation icon display area 800, a variation icon 801 (display mode: white) corresponding to the special figure 1 variation game is displayed. First hold icons 1901 and 1902 are displayed in the first area and the second area of the first hold icon display area 1900, respectively. In a first area and a second area of the second hold icon display area 2900, a second hold icon 2901 (display mode: white) and a second hold icon 2902 (display mode: white) are displayed.

  FIG. 40B shows a first example in a state where the number of suspensions of special figure 1 is increased by two during the special figure 1 variable game. As shown in FIG. 40 (b), the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 indicates that the number of holdings in the special figure 1 has increased from 2 to 4 by turning on the third to fourth LEDs from the left. . New first hold icons 1903 and 1904 are displayed in the third area and the fourth area of the first hold icon display area 1900. In the third area and the fourth area of the second hold icon display area 2900, a new second hold icon 2903 (display mode: white) and a second hold icon 2904 (display mode: white) are displayed. In the example shown in FIG. 40B, the display modes of the second hold icons 2901 to 2904 are all the default “white”. The second hold icon displayed in the default display mode “white” indicates that pre-reading is not executed for the corresponding hold, or that pre-reading is executed and the jackpot reliability is lowest (for example, trust). Degree of 0.06%). In this example, the first hold icons 1901 to 1904 and the second hold icons 2901 to 2904 are not displayed in duplicate.

  FIG. 40 (c) shows a second example in a state in which the number of suspensions of special figure 1 is increased by two during the special figure 1 variable game. As shown in FIG. 40C, in the third area and the fourth area of the second hold icon display area 2900, a new second hold icon 2903 (display mode: white) and a second hold icon 2904 (display mode) are displayed. : Family crest) is displayed. Compared with the first example shown in FIG. 40 (b), the second example differs in that the display mode of the second hold icon 2904 is “family crest” (for example, reliability 100%) having the highest jackpot reliability. ing. In this example, the second hold icon displayed in the display mode “family crest” has a larger display size than the second hold icon displayed in another display mode. Thereby, a part of the first hold icon 1901 displayed in the first area of the first hold icon display area 1900 and the second hold icon 2904 displayed in the fourth area of the second hold icon display area 2900. A part of is duplicated. In this example, the second hold icon is displayed with priority over the first hold icon (the second hold icon is displayed in a layer before the first hold icon). The part is blocked by the second hold icon 2904 and cannot be visually recognized.

  As shown in FIGS. 40B and 40C, when the display mode of the second hold icon displayed in the second hold icon display area 2900 is the default, it is displayed in the first hold icon display area 1900. The first hold icon is not hidden, but the display mode of the second hold icon is a specific mode (for example, a mode with higher reliability than the default, a mode with the highest reliability, a mode with 100% reliability, etc.) In this case, a part of the first hold icon in the first hold icon display area 1900 may be hidden by overlapping display.

  FIG. 40 (d) shows a third example in a state where the number of suspensions of special figure 1 is increased by two during the special figure 1 variable game. As shown in FIG. 40D, a part of the first hold icon 1901 and a part of the second hold icon 2904 overlap. In the third example, unlike the second example shown in FIG. 40 (c), the first hold icon is displayed with priority over the second hold icon. It is blocked by the hold icon 1901 and is no longer visible.

  As shown in FIGS. 40C and 40D, when the first hold icon and the second hold icon are displayed in an overlapping manner, the second hold icon having a large display size may be displayed with priority. The first hold icon with a small display size may be displayed with priority. Alternatively, the second hold icon may be displayed with priority at a certain timing, and the first hold icon may be displayed with priority at another timing.

  FIG. 40 (e) shows a modification of the present embodiment. In the present modification, the first hold icon display area 1900 is the same as that shown in FIGS. 40A to 40D, but the configuration of the second hold icon display area 2900 is different. As shown in FIG. 40 (e), the second hold icon display area 2900 of the present modification has a first area, a second area, and a third area from the right (first hold icon display area 1900 side) to the left. It is divided into four areas, an area and a fourth area. The first area of the second hold icon display area 2900 is arranged adjacent to the first hold icon display area 1900. In the state shown in FIG. 40 (e), the first hold icon 1901 displayed in the first area of the first hold icon display area 1900 and the first icon displayed in the first area of the second hold icon display area 2900. Two hold icons 2901 are duplicated. That is, in this modification, the first hold icon 1901 and the second hold icon 2901 corresponding to the earliest hold are displayed in duplicate. Thus, the hold icons corresponding to the same hold may be displayed in duplicate. In particular, by allowing the hold icons corresponding to the earliest hold to be displayed in an overlapping manner, one of the hold icons can always be hidden by the other whenever a hold occurs. In this modification, the second hold icon is displayed with priority over the first hold icon, but the first hold icon may be displayed with priority over the second hold icon.

  In the case of having a plurality of hold icon display areas and displaying a plurality of images (for example, a plurality of hold icons) in each display area, when hiding at least part of the other image with one image, (1) (For example, only one hold icon 1901 of the plurality of first hold icons 1901 to 1904 in the first hold icon display area 1900 and the second hold icon display area 2900 are overlapped). By superimposing only one hold icon 2904 among a plurality of second hold icons 2901 to 2904 (see FIGS. 40C and 40D), the image (for example, the first hold icon 1901 or the second hold icon 2901). The hold icon 2904) may be conspicuous, or (2) other images other than one of the plurality of images are overlaid (for example, the first hold icon table) Of the plurality of first hold icons 1901 to 1904 in the area 1900, the other hold icons 1902 to 1904 except for one hold icon 1901, and among the plurality of second hold icons 2901 to 2904 in the second hold icon display area 2900 One image (for example, the first hold icon 1901 or the second hold icon 2904) may be made conspicuous by superimposing other hold icons 2901 to 2903 excluding one hold icon 2904.

(Example 2-5)
41 and 42 show examples of effects in Example 2-5 of the present embodiment. In this embodiment, a plurality of types of production stages (for example, Yoshimune stage, Sakai stage, Hime stage) are prepared, and the aspect of the first reserved icon display area 1900 is common to all the production stages. The mode of the hold icon display area 2900 is different for each stage.

  FIG. 41A shows a state during the variation period of the special figure 1 variable game in the Yoshimune stage. As shown in FIG. 41A, in the Yoshimune stage, a first reserved icon display area 1900 common to each stage and a second reserved icon display area 2900 unique to the Yoshimune stage are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The mode of the second hold icon display area 2900 unique to the Yoshimune stage is the same as the second hold icon display area 2900 of Example 2-4 shown in FIGS.

  In the special figure 1 display device 212, the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is performed. The special figure 1 holding lamp 218 indicates that the number of holdings in the special figure 1 is 3 by turning on the first to third LEDs from the left. The special figure 2 holding lamp 220 displays that the number of holdings in the special figure 2 is 0 by turning off all the LEDs.

  In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In the variation icon display area 800, a variation icon 801 (display mode: white) corresponding to the special figure 1 variation game is displayed. First hold icons 1901, 1902, and 1903 are displayed in the first to third areas of the first hold icon display area 1900, respectively. As a result, in the first hold icon display area 1900, it is notified that the hold number in FIG. In the first to third areas of the second hold icon display area 2900, a second hold icon 2901 (display mode: white), a second hold icon 2902 (display mode: white), and a second hold icon 2903 (display mode). : Blue) are displayed. As a result, in the second hold icon display area 2900, it is notified that the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 3, and whether the hold corresponding to the second hold icon 2903 is prefetched with a predetermined reliability. In the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, it is displayed that the current stage is “Yoshimune stage”.

  FIG. 41B shows a state in which all the special figure variation games that have been put on hold have ended in the Yoshimune stage. As shown in FIG. 41B, the fluctuation icon display area 800, the first hold icon display area 1900, and the second hold icon display area 2900 do not display the change icon or the hold icon. At the center of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the stage change by pressing the chance button 136 is overlapped before the decorative symbol (the symbol combination for notifying the deviation) stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. A text message that prompts the person “You can select a stage with the chance button” is displayed. In this example, at the timing when all the special figure variable games are finished (the timing when the hold is 0 and the time is not changing), it is possible to change the effect stage by the player's operation.

  When the chance button 136 is pressed once by the player in the state shown in FIG. 41 (b), the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 changes to an effect stage selection screen as shown in FIG. 41 (c). On the stage selection screen, the Yoshimune character image (image corresponding to the Yoshimune stage) displayed in the center frame moves out of the frame (upper right), and the heel character image (outside the upper left) ( (Image corresponding to the stage) moves into the frame. The player is notified that the production stage is changed from the Yoshimune stage to the Samurai stage by the movement of these character images and the text message “determined as Samurai stage” displayed at the bottom of the screen.

  FIG. 41 (d) shows a state during the fluctuation period of the special figure 1 variable game in the samurai stage. As shown in FIG. 41 (d), the first hold icon display area 1900 common to each stage and the second hold icon display area 2910 specific to the heel stage are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 in the heel stage. The second hold icon display area 2910 does not display the number of holds in FIG. 1 as the number of hold icons, but displays the number of holds in FIG. 1 as a numeric image. Further, the display of the variation icon display area is omitted on the heel stage.

  In the special figure 1 display device 212, the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is performed. The special figure 1 holding lamp 218 indicates that the number of holdings in the special figure 1 is 2 by turning on the first and second LEDs from the left. The special figure 2 holding lamp 220 displays that the number of holdings in the special figure 2 is 0 by turning off all the LEDs.

  In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. First hold icons 1904 and 1905 are displayed in a first area and a second area of the first hold icon display area 1900, respectively. As a result, in the first hold icon display area 1900, it is notified that the hold number in FIG. In the second hold icon display area 2910, a numeric image “2” is displayed. As a result, in the second hold icon display area 2910, it is notified that the hold number in FIG. In the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, it is displayed that the current stage is the “爺 stage”.

  FIG. 41 (e) shows a state in which all the special figure variation games that have been put on hold have been completed in the samurai stage. At the center of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the stage change by pressing the chance button 136 is overlapped before the decorative symbol (the symbol combination for notifying the deviation) stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. A text message that prompts the person “You can select a stage with the chance button” is displayed.

  When the chance button 136 is pressed once by the player in the state shown in FIG. 41 (e), the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 changes to an effect stage selection screen as shown in FIG. 41 (f). On the stage selection screen, the frog character image displayed in the center frame moves outside the frame (upper right), and the princess character image (image corresponding to the princess stage) displayed outside the frame (upper left) is displayed. Move into the frame. The player is notified that the production stage is changed from the samurai stage to the princess stage by the movement of these character images and the text message “determined to be the princess stage” displayed at the bottom of the screen.

  FIG. 42A shows a state after changing to the princess stage. As shown in FIG. 42 (a), in the princess stage, the first hold icon display area 1900 common to each stage (the first hold icon is not displayed because the hold number in FIG. 1 is 0), and the princess stage A unique second hold icon display area 2920 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The second hold icon display area 2920 overlaps at least a part of the first hold icon display area 1900 and is arranged vertically along the right edge of the screen. The second hold icon display area 2920 also overlaps with a part of the symbol display area 208c. The second hold icon display area 2920 can display a maximum of four hold icons, and is divided into four areas of a first area, a second area, a third area, and a fourth area from the bottom to the top. . In each of the first to fourth areas of the second hold icon display area 2920, a circular image indicating the outline of the second hold icon is always displayed. The sizes of the first region to the fourth region are as follows: first region <second region <third region <fourth region. In this example, the second hold icon displayed in the second hold icon display area 2920 is arranged in a layer in front of the first hold icon displayed in the first hold icon display area 1900, and the symbol display area 208c. It is arranged in a layer behind the decorative symbol that is displayed in a variable manner or stopped. In the princess stage, the display of the change icon display area is omitted. In the upper left corner of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, it is displayed that the current stage is the “princess stage”.

  FIG. 42B shows a state during the variation period of the special figure 1 variable game in the princess stage. As shown in FIG. 42 (b), the special figure 1 display device 212 displays the fluctuation of special figure 1. The special figure 1 holding lamp 218 indicates that the number of holdings in the special figure 1 is 2 by turning on the first and second LEDs from the left. The special figure 2 holding lamp 220 displays that the number of holdings in the special figure 2 is 0 by turning off all the LEDs.

  In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. First hold icons 1906 and 1907 are displayed in first to second areas of the first hold icon display area 1900, respectively. As a result, in the first hold icon display area 1900, it is notified that the hold number in FIG. A second hold icon 2926 and a second hold icon 2927 are displayed in the first area to the second area of the second hold icon display area 2920, respectively. As a result, in the second hold icon display area 2920, it is notified that the hold number in FIG. The first hold icons 1906 and 1907 in the first hold icon display area 1900 overlap the third area in the second hold icon display area 2920, but the second hold icon is not displayed in the third area. Therefore, it is visible without being blocked by the second hold icon.

  FIG. 42 (c) shows a state in which the number of suspensions of special figure 1 has increased by two during the fluctuation period of the special figure 1 variable game. As shown in FIG. 42 (c), the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 indicates that the number of holdings in the special figure 1 has increased from 2 to 3 by turning on the third LED from the left.

  New first hold icons 1908 and 1909 are displayed in the third area and the fourth area of the first hold icon display area 1900. New second hold icons 2928 and 2929 are displayed in the third area and the fourth area of the second hold icon display area 2920. Here, the second hold icon 2928 newly displayed in the third area of the second hold icon display area 2920 is the first hold displayed in the first area and the second area of the first hold icon display area 1900. Each of the icons 1906 and 1907 overlaps with each other. As a result, the entire first hold icons 1906 and 1907 are shielded by the second hold icon 2928 and cannot be viewed. The second hold icon 2929 newly displayed in the fourth area of the second hold icon display area 2920 is the first hold newly displayed in the third area and the fourth area of the first hold icon display area 1900. Each of the icons 1908 and 1909 overlaps with a part. Thereby, some of the first hold icons 1908 and 1909 are blocked by the second hold icon 2929 and cannot be visually recognized.

  In this way, when there are a plurality of production stages, the first hold icon and the second hold icon may be displayed in duplicate in a certain production stage (for example, only a specific production stage). . At this time, the overlap between the first hold icon and the second hold icon may be performed regardless of the corresponding hold. For example, like the first hold icons 1906, 1907 (corresponding to the first and second hold) and the second hold icon 2928 (corresponding to the third hold), the hold icons corresponding to different hold are mutually overlapped. Alternatively, like the first hold icon 1909 (corresponding to the fourth hold) and the second hold icon 2929 (corresponding to the fourth hold), the hold icons corresponding to the same hold are duplicated. Also good.

  Also, in this example, when the first hold icon and the second hold icon overlap, it becomes difficult to recognize the number of holds by either the first hold icon display area 1900 or the second hold icon display area 2920. However, the number of holds can be easily recognized on either side. This may prevent misrecognition of the number of holds.

  Moreover, in this example, since a part of 2nd holding | maintenance icon display area 2920 and a part of symbol display area 208c overlap, a part of 2nd holding | maintenance icon may be shielded by a decoration design. On the other hand, since the first hold icon display area 1900 does not overlap with the symbol display area 208c, the first hold icon is not blocked by the decorative symbol.

  The stage change may be performed at an arbitrary timing by the player's operation, or may be performed according to a result of a predetermined effect lottery performed at a predetermined timing. By changing the display mode of the plurality of hold icon display areas for each stage, it may be possible to change the area that the player wants to pay attention to. Moreover, it may be possible to emphasize that the stage has been changed by switching between the case where one hold icon display area is hidden and the case where it is not hidden depending on the stage.

(Example 2-6)
FIG. 43 shows an example of effects in Example 2-6 of the present embodiment. The present embodiment is an example in which an image (for example, a hold icon) of the decorative symbol display device 208 may be hidden by an effect item (for example, a movable character).

  FIG. 43A shows the positional relationship when the decorative symbol display device 208 and the movable combination objects 1001 to 1004 in this embodiment are viewed from the front. FIG. 43 (a ′) shows the positional relationship when the decorative symbol display device 208 and the movable combination objects 1001 to 1004 are viewed from above. The movable accessories 1001 to 1004 are located in front of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 (on the player side). The movable actors 1001 to 1004 are controlled by the first sub-control unit 400 or the second sub-control unit 500 using a solenoid (not shown) or the like in the standby position (lower position, default position) and effect position (upper position). Are driven independently. The main body portions of the movable accessories 1001 to 1004 are formed of an opaque flat plate member and have a human-like planar shape.

  When the movable combinations 1001 to 1004 are in the standby position, the entire movable combinations 1001 to 1004 are positioned below the lower end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this state, when viewed from the front side of the pachinko machine 100 (for example, the position of the player's eyes), the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is not blocked by the movable accessories 1001 to 1004. On the other hand, when the movable combinations 1001 to 1004 protrude upward and are in the production position, at least a part of the movable combinations 1001 to 1004 is positioned above the lower end of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this state, when viewed from the front side of the pachinko machine 100, a part of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 is shielded by the movable accessories 1001 to 1004. In this example, when viewed from the front side of the pachinko machine 100, the movable accessories 1001 to 1004 at the production position independently shield the first area to the fourth area of the reserved icon display area 900, respectively. ing. For example, when the movable accessory 1001 is in the effect position, the entire first area of the hold icon display area 900 is shielded by the movable accessory 1001, but the second to fourth areas other than the first area are completely shielded. (Or only a part is shielded). The same applies to the movable accessories 1002 to 1004.

  In the state shown in FIG. 43 (a), since all of the movable combinations 1001 to 1004 are in the production position, the first area to the fourth area of the hold icon display area 900 are shielded by the movable combinations 1001 to 1004, respectively. And cannot be seen from the front. However, as shown in FIG. 43 (a ′), since a predetermined gap is formed between the movable accessories 1001 to 1004 and the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, the position of the player's eye 1010 By moving the to the left and right and looking from the side, a part or the whole of the first area to the fourth area of the hold icon display area 900 may be visible.

  FIG. 43B shows an example of a state in which the number of holds in FIG. Of the three holds, the first and third holds are non-notice hold, and the second hold is a notice hold. In this example, the hold icon is not displayed for the hold to be notified, and the movable accessory at the corresponding position is driven to the effect position. For example, in the state shown in FIG. 43B, a hold icon 901 (display mode: white) corresponding to the first hold is displayed in the first area of the hold icon display area 900, and the third area is displayed in the third area. Although the hold icon 903 (display mode: white) corresponding to the second hold is displayed, the hold icon corresponding to the second hold is not displayed in the second area. For the second hold, instead of displaying the hold icon in the second area of the hold icon display area 900, a movable accessory 1002 that exists at a position corresponding to the second area and can shield the second area is produced. Notification is made by driving to a position.

  The pre-reading notice may be performed by notifying the holding with the movable accessories 1001 to 1004. For example, all the reservations subject to the advance notice may be notified by the movable actors 1001 to 1004, or a part of the advance notice subject hold (for example, only the winners won in the predetermined effect lottery) may be notified. You may alert | report.

  FIG. 43 (c) shows another example in which the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 3 and the second hold is the subject of notice. In this example, unlike the example shown in FIG. 43B, the hold icon 902 (display mode: blue) corresponding to the second hold to be notified is displayed in the second display of the hold icon display area 900 in a predetermined display mode. It is displayed in the area. However, when viewed from the position of the normal player's eyes, the hold icon 902 cannot be visually recognized because it is shielded by the movable accessory 1002. In this case, since the hold icon 902 appears and disappears when the player moves his / her eye position, the player may be able to entertain.

  FIG. 43 (c ′) shows a modification of the present embodiment. The movable objects 1001 to 1004 of this example are formed of a transparent member (for example, a transparent or translucent member). Accordingly, even when the hold icon 902 is shielded by the movable accessory 1002 as in FIG. 43C, the hold icon 902 can be seen through the movable accessory 1002. In addition, when the movable accessories 1001 to 1004 are formed of transparent members as in this example, one decoration may be formed by the movable accessory and the hold icon displayed in the back thereof. Good.

  FIG. 43 (d) shows a state in which the next special figure 1 variable game is started after the state shown in FIG. 43 (c). As shown in FIG. 43 (d), when the next special figure 1 variable game is started, the movement animation of the hold icon is started. In this movement animation, the hold icon 901 moves from the first area to the outside of the display area, the hold icon 902 moves from the second area to the first area, and the hold icon 903 moves from the third area to the second area. Further, as the hold icon 902 to be notified moves from the second area to the first area by the moving animation, the movable accessory 1002 that can shield the second area is driven to move from the effect position to the standby position, The movable accessory 1001 that can shield the first region is driven to move from the standby position to the effect position. At this time, the movement of the hold icon is merely a change of the display position on the screen, whereas the movement of the movable accessory needs to be actually moved by applying a force to the stationary object. For this reason, the movement of the movable accessory may be slower than the movement of the hold icon, particularly at the beginning of the movement. For this reason, as shown in FIG. 43 (d), the movable accessory 1002 that is moving from the effect position to the standby position may hide the two hold icons 902 and 903 at the same time.

  On the other hand, when the moving speed of the movable combination is fast (when the force applied to the movable combination is large), the movable combination that is moving from the standby position to the effect position as shown in FIG. The object 1001 may hide the two hold icons 901 and 902 at the same time.

(Example 2-7)
44 and 45 show examples of effects in Example 2-7 of the present embodiment. FIG. 44 (a) shows a state during a variable period of a certain special figure 1 variable game. As shown in FIG. 44 (a), the special figure 1 display device 212 displays the fluctuation shown in FIG. The special figure 1 holding lamp 218 indicates that the number of holdings in the special figure 1 is 1 by turning on the leftmost LED. The special figure 2 holding lamp 220 displays that the number of holdings in the special figure 2 is 0 by turning off all the LEDs.

  In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In the variation icon display area 800, a variation icon 801 (display mode: white) corresponding to the special figure 1 variation game is displayed. A first hold icon 1901 is displayed in the first area of the first hold icon display area 1900. A second hold icon 2901 (display mode: white) is displayed in the first area of the second hold icon display area 2900.

  FIG. 44 (b) shows a state in which the special figure 1 hold has increased by one during the special figure 1 variable game. As shown in FIG. 44 (b), the special figure 1 holding lamp 218 indicates that the number of holdings in the special figure 1 has increased from 1 to 2 by turning on the second LED from the left. A new first hold icon 1902 is displayed in the second area of the first hold icon display area 1900. A new second hold icon 2902 is displayed in the second area of the second hold icon display area 2900. It is assumed that the second hold icon 2902 is a hold icon subject to prefetching notice. The second hold icon 2902 includes a predetermined change scenario for the icon image (icon main body image) and a predetermined change scenario for the icon-attached image when the hold corresponding to the second hold icon 2902 increases. It shall be set by lottery. Further, a scenario for changing an icon-attached image related to a hold icon (for example, a hold icon 2903 shown in FIG. 44 (d), a hold icon 2904 shown in FIG. 44 (f), etc.) corresponding to a hold that increases later. Are set by lottery when the number of hold corresponding to the second hold icon 2902 increases.

  FIG. 44 (c) shows an enlarged view of the second hold icon 2902 in FIG. 44 (b). As shown in FIG. 44 (c), the second hold icon 2902 includes an icon image 2902 a having a display mode “green” and a plate image (icon attached image) 2902 b having a display mode “reach”. The plate image 2902b is displayed in a layer in front of the icon image 2902a, and the entire plate image 2902b overlaps a part of the icon image 2902a. Accordingly, the part of the icon image 2902a is blocked by the plate image 2902b and cannot be visually recognized. However, the fact that the display mode of the icon image 2902a is “green” can be identified by other visible parts.

  FIG. 44 (d) shows a state in which the special FIG. 1 suspension is further increased by one during the special FIG. 1 variable game. As shown in FIG. 44 (d), the special figure 1 hold lamp 218 indicates that the number of hold in the special figure 1 has increased from 2 to 3 by turning on the third LED from the left. A new first hold icon 1903 is displayed in the third area of the first hold icon display area 1900. A new second hold icon 2903 is displayed in the third area of the second hold icon display area 2900. It is assumed that the second hold icon 2903 is a hold icon that is not subject to prefetching notice.

  FIG. 44 (e) shows an enlarged view of the second hold icon 2903 in FIG. 44 (d). As shown in FIG. 44 (e), the second hold icon 2903 includes an icon image 2903 a having a display mode “white” and a plate image (icon attached image) 2903 b having a display mode “chance”. As described above, the display mode of the plate image 2903b is determined based on the change scenario set by lottery when the hold corresponding to the second hold icon 2902 increases. The plate image 2903b is displayed in a layer in front of the icon image 2903a, and the entire plate image 2903b overlaps a part of the icon image 2903a. Thereby, the part of the icon image 2903a is blocked by the plate image 2903b and cannot be visually recognized.

  FIG. 44 (f) shows a state in which the special FIG. 1 suspension is further increased by one and the special FIG. 1 variable game is completed. As shown in FIG. 44 (f), the special figure E (displacement) is stopped and displayed on the special figure 1 display device 212, and the symbol display areas 208a to 208c have symbol combinations “decorations other than the symbol combination for notifying the winning. “7-decoration 1-decoration 1” is stopped. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 indicates that the number of hold in the special figure 1 has increased from 3 to 4 by turning on the fourth LED from the left. A new first hold icon 1904 is displayed in the fourth area of the first hold icon display area 1900. A new second hold icon 2904 is displayed in the fourth area of the second hold icon display area 2900. It is assumed that the second hold icon 2904 is a hold icon that is not subject to prefetching notice.

  FIG. 45A shows an enlarged view of the second hold icon 2904 in FIG. As shown in FIG. 45A, the second hold icon 2904 includes an icon image 2904a having a display mode “white” and a plate image (icon attached image) 2904b having a display mode “heat”. As described above, the display mode of the plate image 2904b is determined based on the change scenario set by lottery when the hold corresponding to the second hold icon 2902 increases. The plate image 2904b is displayed in a layer in front of the icon image 2904a, and the entire plate image 2904b overlaps a part of the icon image 2904a. Accordingly, the part of the icon image 2904a is blocked by the plate image 2904b and cannot be visually recognized.

  FIG. 45 (b) shows a state in which the next special figure 1 variable game is started. As shown in FIG. 45 (b), in the special figure 1 display device 212, the fluctuation display of the special figure 1 is started. The special figure 1 hold lamp 218 indicates that the number of hold in the special figure 1 has decreased from 4 to 3 by turning off the fourth LED from the left.

  In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the decorative symbol variation display is started. The variation icon 801 displayed in the variation icon display area 800 has already been deleted with a predetermined deletion animation, for example.

  In the first hold icon display area 1900, the first hold icon 1901 displayed in the first area is deleted, and the three first hold icons 1902, 1903, and 1904 move to the first to third areas, respectively. Yes. When the first hold icon moves, a predetermined movement animation may be accompanied.

  The second hold icon 2901 displayed in the first area of the second hold icon display area 2900 becomes a change icon 802 and starts moving to the change icon display area 800. When the fluctuation icon moves from the second hold icon display area 2900 to the fluctuation icon display area 800, a predetermined movement animation may be accompanied. The second hold icons 2902 to 2904 displayed in the second area to the fourth area of the second hold icon display area 2900 have started moving to the first area to the third area, respectively. When the second hold icon moves, a predetermined movement animation may be accompanied.

  In this example, in the middle of the movement of the second hold icon, the plate image of the second hold icon that is not subject to the prefetching notice may move to the second hold icon that is subject to the prefetching notice. In the example shown in FIG. 45B, the plate image 2903b of the second hold icon 2903 and the plate image 2904b of the second hold icon 2904 are moved to the second hold icon 2902. As described above, there are cases where plate images that have been duplicated with icon images by a plurality of other hold icons are gathered into one hold icon.

  FIG. 45C shows an enlarged view of the second hold icon 2902 in FIG. As shown in FIG. 45C, the second hold icon 2902 in the middle of moving from the second area of the second hold icon display area 2900 to the first area includes an icon image 2902a of the display mode “green”, and a display mode. A plate image 2902b of “reach”, a plate image 2903b of the display mode “chance” moved from the second hold icon 2903, and a plate image 2904b of the display mode “heat” moved from the second hold icon 2904 Has been. A part of the icon image 2902a is blocked by the three plate images 2902b, 2903b, and 2904b and cannot be visually recognized. However, the fact that the display mode of the icon image 2902a is “green” can be identified by other visible parts.

  FIG. 45D shows a state in which the movement of the change icon 802 and the second hold icon 2902 to 2904 has been completed. As shown in FIG. 45 (d), the movement of the change icon 802 from the first area of the second hold icon display area 2900 to the change icon display area 800 has been completed. The second hold icons 2902 to 2904 have finished moving from the second area to the fourth area of the second hold icon display area 2900 to the first area to the third area, respectively.

  FIG. 45 (e) shows an enlarged view of the second hold icon 2902 in FIG. 45 (d). As shown in FIG. 45 (e), with the end of the movement of the second hold icon 2902, the display mode of the icon image 2902a of the second hold icon 2902 is changed from “green” to “red” based on the change scenario. ing. In this example, when the display mode of the icon image is changed, the display mode of the plate image may be changed. In the example shown in FIG. 45 (e), the plate image 2902b (display mode: reach), the plate image 2903b (display mode: chance), and the plate image 2904b (display mode: heat) are combined to form one plate image 2902c ( Display mode: intense heat).

(A1)
A first symbol display means (for example, the special symbol 1 display device 212 shown in FIG. 3) capable of executing at least symbol variation display;
Display means capable of displaying at least a plurality of types of hold icons (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 3);
First control means (for example, main control unit 300 shown in FIG. 4) capable of controlling at least the first symbol display means;
Second control means capable of controlling at least the display means (for example, the first sub control unit 400 and the second sub control unit 500 shown in FIG. 4);
A game machine equipped with
At least one of the plurality of types of hold icons is a first hold icon (for example, hold icons 901, 902, and 904 shown in FIG. 38B),
At least one of the plurality of types of hold icons is a second hold icon (for example, a hold icon 903 shown in FIG. 38B),
The display means is a means capable of displaying at least a number of hold icons corresponding to the number of holds,
The second control means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 shown in FIG. 4) can execute at least the first control when the first condition is satisfied. Means,
The first condition is a condition that may be satisfied when one or more hold icons are displayed,
The first control is a control for causing the display means to display at least a first image (for example, hold icons 901, 902, 903, and 904 shown in FIG. 38B),
The first control includes at least a part of the display area of the first image and a second image (for example, the pedestal image 909 shown in FIGS. 38A and 38D, or FIG. 38B). , Control for causing the display means to display at least both the first image and the second image so that at least a part of the display area of the pedestal image 909) shown in FIG. ,
Said 1st control is control which can display said 1st image on said display means preferentially rather than said 2nd image (for example, Fig.38 (a)-FIG.38 (d)) reference),
The first image is the hold icon (for example, hold icons 901, 902, 903, and 904 shown in FIG. 38B),
The second image is an image indicating a position where the hold icon is displayed (for example, the pedestal image 909 shown in FIGS. 38A and 38D, or FIGS. 38B and 38B). pedestal image 909) shown in c),
The second hold icon (for example, the hold icon 903 shown in FIG. 38B) is different in form from the first hold icon (for example, the hold icons 901, 902, and 904 shown in FIG. 38B). Icon,
The second hold icon is an icon displayed as a prefetch notice,
The display means is a means capable of displaying the second image by a first mode (for example, a pedestal image 909 shown in FIGS. 38 (a) and 38 (d)),
The display means is a means capable of displaying the second image by a second mode (for example, a pedestal image 909 shown in FIGS. 38B and 38C),
The second image displayed in the second mode is an image displayed as a prefetch notice (see, for example, paragraph “0557”, FIG. 38B, FIG. 38C),
Prefetching notice by displaying the second hold icon (hereinafter referred to as “first prefetching notice”) and prefetching notice by displaying the second image in the second mode (hereinafter referred to as “first notice”). The second pre-reading notice is ended after the first pre-reading notice (for example, FIG. 38 (b) to FIG. 38B). FIG. 38 (d)),
The hold of the first prefetch notice target and the hold of the second prefetch notice target are the same (see, for example, paragraph “0557”).
A game stand characterized by that.
(A2)
A gaming machine according to (A1),
A second symbol display means (for example, symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 3) capable of at least executing symbol variation display;
The second control means is means capable of controlling the second symbol display means.
A game stand characterized by that.
(A3)
(A2) is a gaming machine according to
The second image is an image whose shape does not change according to the change in the number of reservations (see, for example, FIGS. 38A to 38D).
A game stand characterized by that.
(A4)
(A2) or (A3) is a gaming table,
The display means is means capable of displaying at least the second image in the second mode while displaying the second hold icon (see, for example, FIG. 38B).
A game stand characterized by that.
(A5)
(A2) to (A4) according to any one of (A4),
The second image is an image displayed below the hold icon,
The display means is means capable of displaying in the second mode at least a position immediately below the second hold icon in the second image (see, for example, FIG. 38B).
A game stand characterized by that.
(A6)
(A2) to (A5) according to any one of (A5),
The second control means is a means capable of executing at least the second control when the second condition is satisfied,
The second control is control for erasing at least the second image (see, for example, FIG. 37B).
A game stand characterized by that.
(A7)
(A2) to (A6) according to any one of (A6),
The display means is a means capable of displaying the plurality of types of hold icons in a hold display area (for example, a hold icon display area 900 shown in FIG. 38).
The display means is means for not displaying the hold icon in the hold display area when notifying that the hold number is zero (for example, see FIG. 37 (d)).
A game stand characterized by that.
(A8)
(A2) to (A7) according to any one of the game tables,
The first control means is means capable of transmitting at least a command to the second control means (for example, command setting transmission processing (step S233) shown in FIG. 7).
A game stand characterized by that.
(A9)
(A8) is a gaming machine according to
Whether or not the first prefetch notice (for example, the hold icon 903 shown in FIG. 38B) is executed by the second control means (for example, the first sub-control unit 400 shown in FIG. 4) is determined. Is a notice,
A game stand characterized by that.
(A10)
(A8) or (A9),
The second control means includes a plurality of control circuit boards (for example, the first sub board 160 and the second sub board 164 shown in FIG. 2).
A game stand characterized by that.
(A11)
(A10) is a gaming machine according to
The first control means includes a first control circuit board (for example, the main board 156 shown in FIG. 2),
At least one of the plurality of control circuit boards is a second control circuit board (for example, the first sub board 160 shown in FIG. 2),
At least one of the plurality of control circuit boards is a third control circuit board (for example, the second sub board 164 shown in FIG. 2),
The first control circuit board is a board different from the second control circuit board,
The first control circuit board is a board different from the third control circuit board,
The second control circuit board is a board different from the third control circuit board,
The first control circuit board can transmit at least the command to the second control circuit board (for example, command setting transmission processing (step S233) shown in FIG. 7),
The display means is means connected to at least the third control circuit board.
A game stand characterized by that.
(A12)
(A2) to (A11) according to any one of (A11),
A third symbol display means (for example, the special symbol 2 display device 214 shown in FIG. 3) capable of at least performing symbol variation display;
The first control means is means capable of controlling the third symbol display means,
The second symbol display means is a means capable of executing at least symbol variation display according to the symbol variation start by the first symbol display means,
The second symbol display means is a means capable of executing at least symbol variation display in response to the symbol variation start by the third symbol display means.
A game stand characterized by that.
(A13)
(A12) is a gaming machine according to
The first hold display means (for example, the special display shown in FIG. 3) capable of displaying the number of the operation of the symbol variation display being held in the first symbol display means (hereinafter referred to as “first hold number”). FIG. 1 holding lamp 218),
The first hold display means is provided separately from the display means,
A game stand characterized by that.
(A14)
(A13) is a game machine according to
The second hold display means (for example, the special display shown in FIG. 3) capable of displaying the number of the symbol change display operations held by the third symbol display means (hereinafter referred to as “second hold number”). FIG. 2 hold lamp 220),
The second hold display unit is a unit configured separately from the display unit,
The second hold display means is provided separately from the first hold display means.
A game stand characterized by that.
(A15)
A gaming machine according to (A13) or (A14),
The display means is means capable of displaying the same number as the first hold number as the hold number.
A game stand characterized by that.
(A16)
(A14) A gaming machine according to (A14),
The display means is a means capable of displaying the same number as the second holding number as the holding number.
A game stand characterized by that.
As described above, the gaming machine according to the present embodiment holds the symbol display means (for example, the special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure 2 display device 214, etc.) capable of executing at least the symbol variation display, and the start information. And a storage means (for example, RAM 308, special figure 1 reservation number storage area, special figure 2 reservation number storage area, etc.) and display means (for example, decorative symbol display device 208, reservation) capable of displaying at least an image. Icon display area 900, first hold icon display area 1900, second hold icon display area 2900, etc.), first control means (for example, main control unit 300) capable of at least controlling the symbol display means, and the display A game machine comprising at least a second control means (for example, a first sub-control unit 400 and a second sub-control unit 500) capable of controlling the means, The control means is capable of at least executing the first control when the first condition is satisfied, and the first condition is that the start information is stored as the one storage information. The first control is a condition that may be satisfied when stored in the means, and the first control displays a first image (for example, an icon image of a first hold icon or an icon attached image) on the display means. On the other hand, the first hold icon or the like is displayed at least, and the first control includes at least a part of the display area of the first image and a second image (for example, the first hold icon). The display unit displays at least both the first image and the second image so that at least a part of the display area of the icon image or the icon-attached image, the second hold icon, or the like overlaps. The In the first control, the display means preferentially displays one of the first image and the second image, so that at least a part of the one image is displayed. It is a control that hides at least a part of the other image.

  According to this configuration, the pending display can be displayed in various modes, and the interest of the game stand can be improved (first effect).

  Moreover, according to this structure, the visibility of the image which shows a hold | maintenance may be made to be misidentified, and a stop may be suppressed (2nd effect). However, since the misperception causes the number to be misunderstood less than the actual number, there is no disadvantage for the player.

  In addition, according to this configuration, there is a case where the player's attention can be gathered by making the user care about what is displayed in the area hidden by the other image (third effect).

  Moreover, according to this structure, in order to make a display area lively, a some image can be displayed (4th effect).

  Further, according to this configuration, by setting the priority order in advance, even if the images overlap, it is possible to securely show the image that needs to be shown to the player at that timing. There are cases where oversight can be prevented (fifth effect).

  Here, the first image, the second image, and the third image and the fourth image described later are background images displayed in a relatively wide area (for example, almost the entire area) in the display screen. Not included.

  In the above-described state where at least a part of the other image is hidden by at least a part of the one image, there are a plurality of patterns as follows.

  The first pattern is a state in which a part of one image hides a part of the other image by overlapping a part of one image and a part of the other image. In this state, the whole of one image and the other part of the other image can be visually recognized, and a part of the other image becomes difficult to visually recognize (for example, invisible).

  The second pattern is a state in which a part of one image and a whole of the other image overlap each other so that a part of the one image hides the whole of the other image. In this state, the entire one image is visible and the entire other image is difficult to visually recognize.

  The third pattern is a state in which the whole of one image and a part of the other image overlap each other so that the whole of one image hides a part of the other image. In this state, the whole of one image and the other part of the other image can be visually recognized, and a part of the other image becomes difficult to visually recognize.

  The fourth pattern is a state in which all of one image and all of the other image are overlapped, so that all of one image hides all of the other image. In this state, the entire one image is visible and the entire other image is difficult to visually recognize.

  In the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the hold display means can display at least the plurality of hold icons, and at least one of the plurality of hold icons is a first hold icon. Yes, at least one of the plurality of hold icons is a second hold icon, the first image is the first hold icon, and the second image is the second hold icon. It is a hold icon.

  According to this configuration, the number of holds can be more easily misidentified by overlapping the hold icons (for example, the first hold icon and the second hold icon different from the first hold icon). There is a case.

  Moreover, according to this structure, the above-mentioned 1st-5th effect can be produced more notably.

  Moreover, in the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the first control includes at least the second image (for example, the second hold icon corresponding to the same hold as the first hold icon) on the display means. It is the control to display (for example, FIG. 40 (e)).

  According to this configuration, by displaying a plurality of hold icons corresponding to one hold and displaying the plurality of hold icons in a superimposed manner, the display of at least one hold icon is not hindered. In some cases, it is possible to correctly determine the number of holds while displaying misleading.

  In addition, according to this configuration, there is a case where the number of holds can be misidentified by increasing the number of hold icons displayed on the hold display.

  In addition, according to this configuration, in order to prevent misrecognition of the number of holds, even though a plurality of hold icons for one hold are displayed, the plurality of hold icons are overlapped to improve the visibility of one hold icon. In some cases, it can be reduced.

  In the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the hold display means can display at least a plurality of hold icons, and at least one of the plurality of hold icons is a first hold icon (for example, , The first hold icon 1901 in FIG. 40E, and at least one of the plurality of hold icons is a second hold icon (for example, the second hold icon 2901 in FIG. 40E). And at least one of the plurality of hold icons is a third hold icon (for example, the first hold icon 1902 in FIG. 40E), and the first image is the first hold icon The second image is the second hold icon, and the second control unit is configured to store the first start information when the first start information is stored in the hold storage unit. At least a control for displaying both the first hold icon and the second hold icon on the display means can be executed, and the second control means has second start information stored in the hold storage means. When stored, it is possible to execute at least control for displaying the third hold icon on the hold display means, and the second control means is provided when the second condition is satisfied. The second control is at least executable, and the second condition is satisfied when both the first start information and the second start information are stored in the holding storage means. The second control may be configured so that at least a part of the display area of the first hold icon and at least a part of the display area of the second hold icon overlap each other. Ichiho It is a control that displays both an icon and a second hold icon on the hold display means, and the second control is one of the first hold icon and the second hold icon on the display means. This is a control in which one is preferentially displayed and at least a part of the other is hidden by one, and the second control includes at least a part of a display area of the third hold icon and other hold icons. The third hold icon is at least displayed on the display means so as not to overlap at least a part of the display area.

  According to this configuration, image overlap is performed on one hold icon, and image overlap is not performed on the other hold icon. Therefore, it is easy to notice that the images are overlapped by comparison. It may be possible to make a person easily pay attention.

  Moreover, according to this structure, it may be easy for a player to notice that a plurality of images are displayed based on one operation holding ball. (When a plurality of images are displayed based on one operation holding ball, if the plurality of images are displayed apart from each other, they are not aware that the image is displayed based on one operation holding ball, There was a risk of misunderstanding.)

  Here, the first hold icon, the second hold icon, and the third hold icon may be in the same display mode or in different display modes.

  In the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the second control means can execute at least the third control when the third condition is satisfied, and the third control Displays both the first image and the second image on hold so that at least part of the display area of the first image and at least part of the display area of the second image do not overlap. The control is at least displayed on the means (for example, the first and second images overlap at a certain timing but do not overlap at another timing).

  According to this configuration, even if the images overlap at a certain timing, it may be possible to make the player pay attention only at the overlapping timing by designing so as not to overlap at another timing. (It may be possible to emphasize the hold at a specific timing.)

  In the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, at least one of the first condition and the second condition is that a notice condition is satisfied (for example, a predetermined icon attached image is displayed in the icon attached image lottery process). It is a condition that may be satisfied when there is a decision).

  According to this configuration, it is easy to convey to the player that the advance notice has been executed, and the frequency of oversight may be reduced.

  In addition, the game table according to the present embodiment includes a production mode switching means capable of switching at least a plurality of types of production modes (for example, Yoshimune stage, Sakai stage, Hime stage) that can be identified by the player. Or at least one of the second condition is a condition that may be satisfied when the production mode changes from the first production mode to the second production mode. .

  According to this configuration, it may be possible to notify the player that the effect mode has been switched.

  In the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, the second control means can execute at least the fourth control when the fourth condition is satisfied, and the fourth control , At least a part of the display area of the first image and at least a part of the display area of the second image overlap at least both the first image and the second image on the display means. And the fourth control includes the first image and the first image so that at least part of the display area of the first image overlaps at least part of the display area of the third image. The third control is a control for displaying at least both of the third images on the hold display unit, and the fourth control is a method for displaying the first image on the display unit with priority over the second image. , According to the first image, the second The fourth control is a control for concealing at least a part of the image, wherein the display unit displays the first image with priority over the third image. The control is to hide at least a part of the third image.

  According to this configuration, since at least a part of each of the plurality of images can be shielded by one image, there is a case where the number of reservations can be misidentified.

  Moreover, according to this structure, the image which shields a some image may be made more conspicuous.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, there is a game table that performs a pre-reading notice by overlapping a plate with a default hold icon. However, the hold icon and the plate are not displayed separately from the start to the end of the display, and the combination at the start of the display may change, but the combination after the display has started once is changed This is different from the present invention in that it is not performed. (In the prior art, as in Example 2-7 described in FIG. 44 and FIG. 45, the plate displayed superimposed on the first hold icon may move and overlap the second hold icon. In addition, since there is no configuration for displaying a plurality of hold icons that are displayed corresponding to one hold, the display of the correct hold number itself is surely performed while inducing the misunderstanding of the hold number. It is different from the present invention in that it does not have the prior art.

  In the present embodiment, the combination of the hidden image and the hidden image may change. There may be one hidden image and a plurality of hidden images. For example, in FIG. 42C, a plurality of images (first hold icons 1906 and 1907) are hidden by one image (second hold icon 2928). Further, there may be a plurality of images to be hidden and one image to be hidden. For example, in FIG. 38B, one image (pedestal image 909) is hidden by a plurality of images (holding icons 901 to 904). There may be a combination of images that do not overlap each other. For example, a sphere-type icon image and an effect-type icon-attached image do not overlap, and a character-type icon image and a plate-type icon-attached image do not overlap (FIG. 35).

  According to this configuration, it may be possible to display a variety of hold-related images by changing the combination of the hidden image and the hidden image. In addition, for images that may be misunderstood by the player due to being partially hidden (such as symbols that are stopped and displayed), the images may not be overlapped to prevent misidentification. . Further, by making one image (hidden image or hidden image) common, there is a case where the surprise when different combinations are displayed can be increased.

  In the present embodiment, at least a part of the image may be difficult to visually recognize due to the operation of the movable accessory.

  According to this configuration, when a movable object that can protrude in front of the display unit is provided, a gap is always generated between the display unit and the movable object, so that a deviation occurs from the viewpoint of the player. By performing a new display such as looking into the hold icon displayed on the back of the movable object due to this shift, there is a case where the interest of the game stand can be improved. Further, by separating the distance between the display means and the movable object, it is possible to limit the position where the effect can be visually recognized, and it is possible to provide an effect that can be enjoyed only by the player.

  The image overlapping the hold icon may be controlled so as to overlap in advance, or may be controlled separately from the hold icon display control, and may happen to overlap the hold icon.

  For an image that may overlap with a plurality of hold icons as shown in FIG. 38 (in this example, the pedestal image 909), the display mode may not be changed based on whether or not the pre-reading notice is executed.

  As shown in FIG. 39, when the hold icon displayed corresponding to one hold is composed of a combination of a plurality of images, and the combination of the images changes depending on the timing, the display mode of one of the images is prefetched. In the case of the advance notice, there may be a case where a sense of expectation can be obtained by narrowing down the fluctuation to be the target of the pre-read notice but not narrowing down to a specific one change.

  When a plurality of hold icons are displayed corresponding to one hold and the plurality of hold icons are displayed in an overlapping manner, the corresponding hold icons need not be overlapped with each other, as shown in FIG. As shown in (c), even if a hold icon corresponding to another hold (for example, a first hold icon 1901 corresponding to the first hold, a second hold icon 2904 corresponding to the fourth hold) is overlapped. Good. However, as shown in FIG. 40 (e), the corresponding hold icons having the same hold (for example, the first hold icon 1901 corresponding to the first hold and the second hold icon 2901 corresponding to the first hold). May be stacked. The display priority may be determined according to whether or not the pre-reading notice is executed, or the display priority may be set regardless of whether or not the pre-reading notice is executed.

  As shown in FIGS. 41 and 42, when the display mode of the hold icon is changed according to the production stage, it is not necessary to display a plurality of hold icons corresponding to one hold in all stages.

  Depending on the change in the gaming state, a case where a plurality of hold icons are displayed corresponding to one hold and a case where they are not displayed may be switched.

  A movable object that can protrude in front of the liquid crystal as shown in FIG. 43 is provided with a movable position so that the hold displayed at the first position and the hold displayed at the second position can be selected. It may be something that can be hidden. Further, in the case where a plurality of movable objects are provided, a plurality of movable objects may selectively hide one hold.

  Each embodiment and various examples described above can be implemented in combination with each other.

  In the present invention, a pachinko machine is used as an example of a game machine, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a slot machine, an arrangement ball game machine, a sparrow ball game machine, a smart ball, and a predetermined number of game balls are used in a circulating manner. You may apply to an enclosure-type game machine etc.

The game table according to the above embodiment is expressed as follows, for example.
(Appendix 1-1)
A symbol display means capable of executing at least symbol variation display;
A hold display means capable of displaying at least a plurality of types of hold icons;
First control means capable of controlling at least the symbol display means;
Second control means capable of controlling at least the hold display means;
A game machine equipped with
The hold display means is capable of at least increasing the hold icon when a hold increase condition is established,
At least one of the plurality of types of hold icons is a first hold icon,
At least one of the plurality of types of hold icons is a second hold icon,
At least one of the plurality of types of hold icons is a third hold icon,
The second control means is capable of executing at least the first control when the first condition is satisfied,
The second control means can execute at least the second control when the second condition is satisfied,
The first control is a control for causing the hold display means to display the third hold icon as the prefetching notice,
The second control is a control for causing the hold display means to display the second hold icon instead of the first hold icon,
The second condition is a condition that may be satisfied when the first hold icon is displayed on the hold display means.
The second condition is a condition that may be satisfied when the first condition is satisfied.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 1-2)
In the gaming machine described in Appendix 1-1,
Provide notice means that can execute at least a pre-read notice,
The first control means is capable of at least transmitting command information to the second control means,
The second control means is capable of at least executing a control for notifying the notice notice means of the prefetch notice when the result of the prefetch notice execution determination using the command information is a specific result,
The second control means can execute at least the third control when the third condition is satisfied,
The third condition is when a plurality of the first hold icons (hereinafter referred to as “plural first hold icons”) are displayed on the hold display means, and the second condition is satisfied. Is a condition that may hold,
The third control is a control for causing the hold display means to display at least the second hold icon instead of at least one of the plurality of first hold icons.
The third control is a control for causing the hold display means to display at least a fourth hold icon instead of at least one of the plurality of first hold icons,
The display mode of the fourth hold icon is a display mode different from the display mode of the second hold icon.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 1-3)
In the game stand described in Appendix 1-1 or 1-2,
The display mode of the second hold icon is the same display mode as the display mode of the first hold icon.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 1-4)
In the gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1-1 to 1-3,
The second control means is capable of at least performing the fourth control when the fourth condition is satisfied,
The fourth condition is a condition that may be satisfied when the plurality of first hold icons are displayed on the hold display unit and the second condition is satisfied,
The fourth control is a control for causing the hold display means to display the second hold icon instead of one hold icon of the plurality of first hold icons,
The fourth control is a control that causes the hold display means to display the fourth hold icon instead of one hold icon of the plurality of first hold icons,
The display mode of the third hold icon is a display mode different from the display mode of the second hold icon,
The display mode of the third hold icon is a display mode different from the display mode of the fourth hold icon,
The display mode of the second hold icon is a display mode similar to the display mode of the fourth hold icon.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 1-5)
In the game stand according to any one of appendices 1-2 to 1-4,
A plurality of symbol display means (hereinafter referred to as "plurality of symbol display means");
A plurality of the hold display means (hereinafter referred to as "plural hold display means"),
At least one of the plurality of symbol display means is a first symbol display means,
At least one of the plurality of symbol display means is a second symbol display means,
At least one of the plurality of hold display means is a first hold display means,
At least one of the plurality of hold display means is a second hold display means,
The first symbol display means is capable of executing at least a first symbol variation display,
The second symbol display means is capable of executing at least a second symbol variation display,
The first hold display means is capable of at least executing a display indicating the number of operation hold balls that will operate the first symbol display means by the hold icon,
The second hold display means is capable of executing at least a display indicating the number of the operation hold balls that are to operate the second symbol display means by the hold icon,
The second control means is capable of at least executing a control for displaying the third hold icon on the first hold display means as the prefetch notice,
The second control means can execute at least the fifth control when the fifth condition is satisfied,
The fifth condition is satisfied when the first hold icon is displayed on the first hold display means and the third hold icon is displayed on the first hold display means. Is a condition that
The fifth control is a control for displaying at least the second hold icon on the first hold display means instead of the first hold icon displayed on the first hold display means,
The second control means does not change the hold icon displayed on the second hold display means even when the third hold icon is displayed on the first hold display means. Control is at least possible,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 1-6)
In the game stand described in appendix 1-5,
The holding display means displays the number of the operation holding balls that will operate the first symbol display means and / or the number of the operation holding balls that will operate the second symbol display means at a plurality of locations. Is possible,
The second control means is capable of executing a control to display at least the third hold icon on one of the plurality of places when the first condition is satisfied,
The second control means is configured to display at least the first hold icon without displaying the third hold icon at the other of the plurality of places when the first condition is satisfied. Is something that can be performed,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix 2-1)
A symbol display means capable of executing at least symbol variation display;
Hold storage means capable of storing at least start information as a hold;
Display means capable of displaying at least an image;
First control means capable of controlling at least the symbol display means;
Second control means capable of controlling at least the display means;
A game machine equipped with
The second control means is capable of executing at least the first control when the first condition is satisfied,
The first condition is a condition that may be satisfied when one start-up information is stored in the hold storage unit as one hold.
The first control is control for causing the display means to display at least a first image;
In the first control, both the first image and the second image are set so that at least a part of the display area of the first image overlaps at least a part of the display area of the second image. Control for displaying at least on the display means;
In the first control, the display unit preferentially displays one of the first image and the second image, so that at least a part of the one image is at least part of the other image. It is a control that hides a part,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 2-2)
In the game stand described in Appendix 1,
The hold display means can display at least the plurality of hold icons,
At least one of the plurality of hold icons is a first hold icon,
At least one of the plurality of hold icons is a second hold icon,
The first image is the first hold icon,
The second image is the second hold icon,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 2-3)
In the game machine described in Appendix 2-2,
The first control is control for causing the display means to display at least the second image.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 2-4)
In the game stand according to any one of appendices 2-1 to 2-3,
The hold display means is capable of displaying at least a plurality of hold icons,
At least one of the plurality of hold icons is a first hold icon,
At least one of the plurality of hold icons is a second hold icon,
At least one of the plurality of hold icons is a third hold icon,
The first image is the first hold icon,
The second image is the second hold icon,
The second control means controls the display of both the first hold icon and the second hold icon on the hold display means when the first start information is stored in the hold storage means. Is at least feasible,
The second control means is capable of executing at least control for displaying the third hold icon on the hold display means when the second starting information is stored in the hold storage means.
The second control means can execute at least the second control when the second condition is satisfied,
The second condition is a condition that may be satisfied when both the first start information and the second start information are stored in the holding storage unit,
In the second control, the first hold icon and the second hold icon are arranged such that at least a part of the display area of the first hold icon overlaps at least a part of the display area of the second hold icon. It is a control for displaying both of the hold icons at least on the hold display means,
The second control is a control in which one of the first hold icon and the second hold icon is preferentially displayed on the display means, and at least a part of the other is hidden by one. Yes,
In the second control, the third holding icon is displayed on the display means so that at least a part of the display area of the third holding icon does not overlap with at least a part of the display area of another holding icon. At least control to display,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 2-5)
In the game stand according to any one of appendices 2-1 to 2-4,
The second control means is capable of executing at least the third control when the third condition is satisfied,
In the third control, at least part of the display area of the first image and at least part of the display area of the second image do not overlap with each other. It is a control to display both at least on the hold display means,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 2-6)
In the game stand according to any one of appendices 2-1 to 2-5,
At least one of the first condition and the second condition is a condition that may be satisfied when the notice condition is satisfied,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 2-7)
In the game stand according to any one of appendices 2-1 to 2-6,
Provided with a production mode switching means capable of switching at least a plurality of types of production modes that can be identified by the player,
At least one of the first condition or the second condition is a condition that may be satisfied when the effect mode changes from the first effect mode to the second effect mode.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 2-8)
In the game stand according to any one of appendices 2-1 to 2-7,
The second control means is capable of at least performing the fourth control when the fourth condition is satisfied,
The fourth control includes both the first image and the second image so that at least a part of the display area of the first image overlaps at least a part of the display area of the second image. Is a control to display at least on the display means,
In the fourth control, both the first image and the third image are arranged so that at least a part of the display area of the first image overlaps at least a part of the display area of the third image. Is displayed on the hold display means at least,
In the fourth control, at least a part of the second image is hidden by the first image by causing the display unit to display the first image with priority over the second image. Control
In the fourth control, at least a part of the third image is hidden by the first image by causing the display unit to display the first image with priority over the third image. Control
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 3-1)
A first symbol display means capable of executing at least symbol variation display;
Display means capable of displaying at least a plurality of types of hold icons;
First control means capable of controlling at least the first symbol display means;
Second control means capable of controlling at least the display means;
A game machine equipped with
At least one of the plurality of types of hold icons is a first hold icon,
At least one of the plurality of types of hold icons is a second hold icon,
The display means is a means capable of displaying at least a number of hold icons corresponding to the number of holds,
The second control means is a means capable of executing at least the first control when the first condition is satisfied,
The first condition is a condition that may be satisfied when one or more hold icons are displayed,
The first control is control for causing the display means to display at least a first image;
In the first control, at least a part of the display area of the first image and at least a part of the display area of the second image overlap each other. Control for displaying at least an image on the display means;
The first control is a control capable of causing the display means to display the first image preferentially over the second image;
The first image is the hold icon;
The second image is an image showing a position where the hold icon is displayed,
The second hold icon is an icon having a different form from the first hold icon,
The second hold icon is an icon displayed as a prefetch notice,
The display means is means capable of displaying the second image according to the first aspect,
The display means is means capable of displaying the second image according to a second aspect,
The second image displayed in the second aspect is an image displayed as a prefetch notice,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 3-2)
A gaming machine according to appendix 3-1,
A second symbol display means capable of executing at least symbol variation display;
The second control means is means capable of controlling the second symbol display means.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 3-3)
A gaming machine according to attachment 3-2,
The second image is an image whose shape does not change according to the change in the number of reservations.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 3-4)
A game machine according to appendix 3-2 or 3-3,
The display means is means capable of displaying at least the second image in the second mode while displaying the second hold icon.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 3-5)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 3-2 to 3-4,
The second image is an image displayed below the hold icon,
The display means is means capable of displaying in the second mode at least a position immediately below the second hold icon in the second image.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 3-6)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 3-2 to 3-5,
The second control means is a means capable of executing at least the second control when the second condition is satisfied,
The second control is control for erasing at least the second image.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 3-7)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 3-2 to 3-6,
The display means is means capable of displaying the plurality of types of hold icons in a hold display area,
The display means is means for not displaying the hold icon in the hold display area when notifying that the hold number is zero.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 3-8)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 3-2 to 3-7,
The first control means is means capable of transmitting at least a command to the second control means.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 3-9)
A gaming machine according to appendix 3-8,
The pre-reading notice is a notice for determining whether to execute by the second control means,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 3-10)
The game stand according to appendix 3-8 or 3-9,
The second control means includes a plurality of control circuit boards.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 3-11)
A gaming machine according to appendix 3-10,
The first control means includes a first control circuit board,
At least one of the plurality of control circuit boards is a second control circuit board,
At least one of the plurality of control circuit boards is a third control circuit board,
The first control circuit board is a board different from the second control circuit board,
The first control circuit board is a board different from the third control circuit board,
The second control circuit board is a board different from the third control circuit board,
The first control circuit board can transmit at least the command to the second control circuit board;
The display means is means connected to at least the third control circuit board.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 3-12)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 3-2 to 3-11,
A third symbol display means capable of executing at least symbol variation display;
The first control means is means capable of controlling the third symbol display means,
The second symbol display means is a means capable of executing at least symbol variation display according to the symbol variation start by the first symbol display means,
The second symbol display means is a means capable of executing at least symbol variation display in response to the symbol variation start by the third symbol display means.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 3-13)
A gaming machine according to appendix 3-12,
A first on-hold display means capable of displaying a number (hereinafter referred to as “first on-hold number”) of the operation of the symbol fluctuation display in the first symbol display means;
The first hold display means is provided separately from the display means,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 3-14)
A gaming machine according to appendix 3-13,
A second on-hold display means capable of displaying a number (hereinafter referred to as “second on-hold number”) of which the operation of the symbol variation display in the third symbol display means is on hold;
The second hold display unit is a unit configured separately from the display unit,
The second hold display means is provided separately from the first hold display means.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 3-15)
A game machine according to appendix 3-13 or 3-14,
The display means is a means capable of displaying the same number as the first hold number as the hold number.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 3-16)
A gaming machine according to appendix 3-14,
The display means is a means capable of displaying the same number as the second holding number as the holding number.
A game stand characterized by that.

100 Pachinko machine 208 Decorative symbol display devices 208a to 208c Symbol display region 208d Effect display region 208e Fourth symbol display region 212 Special figure 1 display device 214 Special figure 2 display device 300 Main control unit 400 First sub control unit 500 Second sub Control unit 800 Fluctuation icon display areas 801, 802, 803, 811 Fluctuation icon 900 Hold icon display area 910 Special figure 1 Hold icon display area 920 Special figure 2 Hold icon display area 930, 1900 First hold icon display area 940, 2900, 2910, 2920 Second hold icon display area 901, 902, 903, 904, 905, 906, 907, 911, 912, 921, 922, 923, 941, 942, 943 Hold icon

Claims (16)

A first symbol display means capable of executing at least symbol variation display;
Display means capable of displaying at least a plurality of types of hold icons;
First control means capable of controlling at least the first symbol display means;
Second control means capable of controlling at least the display means;
A game machine equipped with
At least one of the plurality of types of hold icons is a first hold icon,
At least one of the plurality of types of hold icons is a second hold icon,
The display means is a means capable of displaying at least a number of hold icons corresponding to the number of holds,
The second control means is a means capable of executing at least the first control when the first condition is satisfied,
The first condition is a condition that may be satisfied when one or more hold icons are displayed,
The first control is control for causing the display means to display at least a first image;
In the first control, at least a part of the display area of the first image and at least a part of the display area of the second image overlap each other. Control for displaying at least an image on the display means;
The first control is a control capable of causing the display means to display the first image preferentially over the second image;
The first image is the hold icon;
The second image is an image showing a position where the hold icon is displayed,
The second hold icon is an icon having a different form from the first hold icon,
The second hold icon is an icon displayed as a prefetch notice,
The display means is means capable of displaying the second image according to the first aspect,
The display means is means capable of displaying the second image according to a second aspect,
The second image being displayed in the second embodiment, Ri image der displayed as pre-read notice,
Prefetching notice by displaying the second hold icon (hereinafter referred to as “first prefetching notice”) and prefetching notice by displaying the second image in the second mode (hereinafter referred to as “first notice”). Second pre-reading notice ”), the second pre-reading notice ends after the first pre-reading notice,
The hold of the subject of the first look-ahead notice and the hold of the subject of the second look-ahead notice are the same,
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to claim 1,
A second symbol display means capable of executing at least symbol variation display;
The second control means is means capable of controlling the second symbol display means.
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to claim 2,
The second image is an image whose shape does not change according to the change in the number of reservations.
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to claim 2 or 3,
The display means is means capable of displaying at least the second image in the second mode while displaying the second hold icon.
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to any one of claims 2 to 4,
The second image is an image displayed below the hold icon,
The display means is means capable of displaying in the second mode at least a position immediately below the second hold icon in the second image.
A game stand characterized by that. A game table according to any one of claims 2 to 5,
The second control means is a means capable of executing at least the second control when the second condition is satisfied,
The second control is control for erasing at least the second image.
A game stand characterized by that. A gaming table according to any one of claims 2 to 6,
The display means is means capable of displaying the plurality of types of hold icons in a hold display area,
The display means is means for not displaying the hold icon in the hold display area when notifying that the hold number is zero.
A game stand characterized by that. A game stand according to any one of claims 2 to 7,
The first control means is means capable of transmitting at least a command to the second control means.
A game stand characterized by that. The game table according to claim 8,
The pre-reading notice is a notice for determining whether to execute by the second control means,
A game stand characterized by that. The game table according to claim 8 or 9, wherein
The second control means includes a plurality of control circuit boards.
A game stand characterized by that. The game table according to claim 10,
The first control means includes a first control circuit board,
At least one of the plurality of control circuit boards is a second control circuit board,
At least one of the plurality of control circuit boards is a third control circuit board,
The first control circuit board is a board different from the second control circuit board,
The first control circuit board is a board different from the third control circuit board,
The second control circuit board is a board different from the third control circuit board,
The first control circuit board can transmit at least the command to the second control circuit board;
The display means is means connected to at least the third control circuit board.
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claims 2 thru | or 11,
A third symbol display means capable of executing at least symbol variation display;
The first control means is means capable of controlling the third symbol display means,
The second symbol display means is a means capable of executing at least symbol variation display according to the symbol variation start by the first symbol display means,
The second symbol display means is a means capable of executing at least symbol variation display in response to the symbol variation start by the third symbol display means.
A game stand characterized by that. A game table according to claim 12,
A first on-hold display means capable of displaying a number (hereinafter referred to as “first on-hold number”) of the operation of the symbol fluctuation display in the first symbol display means;
The first hold display means is provided separately from the display means,
A game stand characterized by that. The game table according to claim 13,
A second on-hold display means capable of displaying a number (hereinafter referred to as “second on-hold number”) of which the operation of the symbol variation display in the third symbol display means is on hold;
The second hold display unit is a unit configured separately from the display unit,
The second hold display means is provided separately from the first hold display means.
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to claim 13 or 14,
The display means is a means capable of displaying the same number as the first hold number as the hold number.
A game stand characterized by that. 15. The game table according to claim 14, wherein
The display means is a means capable of displaying the same number as the second holding number as the holding number.
A game stand characterized by that.

Images